Catalog Ace

Automation Control Equipment
Rotary Dampers
Dampers / Feed Controls
Gas Springs
Main Catalogue
Edition 9/2004
I
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l

S
h
o
c
k

A
b
s
o
r
b
e
r
s
N
ew
m
odels
TUBUS Bumpers
Industrial Shock Absorbers
N
ew
m
odels
Safety Shock Absorbers
N
ew
m
odels
N
ew
m
odels
N
ew
m
odels
ACE-Katalog_2004_UK_Umschlag 18.08.2004 9:37 Uhr Seite 1
World Leader in Motion Control
2
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
For over 40 years ACE has been
acknowledged as the world leader in
motion control.
It was back in the 1960s that the then
unique ACE shock absorber was initially
designed to serve the Detroit
automotive industry. Since then, our
world-renowned shock absorbers have
grown to some 170 different models. In
addition, the ACE motion control range
has developed to include safety shock
absorbers, rotary dampers, hydraulic
dampers, feed controls, TUBUS
Dampers and industrial gas springs.
LIFETIME WARRANTY
ACE was the first manufacturer in its
sector to offer a lifetime warranty on all
of its products. ACE products are
designed and manufactured to ISO
9001 and are guaranteed to be free
from defects in materials or
workmanship. ACE will repair or replace
any of its products determined to have
a defect in materials or workmanship at
any time for the life of the product.
PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT
Due to a continuous product
improvement policy, the company
reserves the right to change a products
specification without notice.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
ACE employs over 250 people
throughout its global network
comprising offices in the UK, Germany
and Japan plus distributors in 85 North
American cities and 43 additional
countries.
The UK office carries an extensive stock
of products and spare parts, so
customers can always rely on a quick
and effective service. In addition, the
approved ACE distributors and team of
area managers shown on the inside
back cover are always on hand to
advise on product selection and any
other aspect of the range.
APPLICATION SIMULATION
AND COMPUTER SELECTION
ACE has developed a sophisticated
suite of computer software. By
combining application data with a
shock absorbers design parameters,
ACE engineers can create an accurate
picture of how a particular shock
absorber will perform under any set of
application conditions. Peak reaction
force, peak deceleration, time through
stroke and velocity decay can be
plotted with extreme accuracy (see
below). The user benefits by having any
guesswork taken out of sizing decisions
and by knowing before installation,
exactly how his shock problem will be
solved.
Simulation can also be used to
maximise the performance of ACE
adjustable models by predicting the
ideal adjustment setting for a particular
group of operating conditions.
Copies of our computer selection
programme are available, free of
charge. The software provides quick
and easy selection of the correct ACE
shock absorber for your application.
For more complex or unusual
applications full technical support and
advice is always freely available.
Editorial
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
Controls International Belvedere Road Newton-le-Willows WA12 0JJ Tel 01925 227171 Fax 01925 229323 E-mail info@ace-controls.co.uk 3
3
Dear Reader,
This catalogue presents all aspects of damping and deceleration methods you need to reduce
harmful and destructive energies effectively. ACE offers coordinated deceleration systems that help
you to attain increased productivity, longer service life, greater power and speeds for your drives,
motors, or systems.
ACE maintains its position as the Market Leader in motion control technology and sets the trend
towards smaller and higher performance control components.
Please note the A of ACE throughout the catalogue. It will point out advantages,
characteristics and new products which we consider important for you.
MA 30 / MA 50
Adjustable Miniatures
Adjustable with thread sizes
M8x1 and M10x1, they combine
energy capacity of 3.5 Nm and
5.5Nm per cycle with a very
small package size.
Mini-TUBUS
Profile Dampers for the
Small Emergency Stop
3 new models complete the
range of products for small
applications and provide
energy capacity from 12 Nm
up to 30 Nm.
All rights to the production, trade names, design and illustrations of this catalogue are reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, copied or printed without permission; violations will be prosecuted.
Construction, dimensions and specifications of ACE products are subject to change.
FFD 25 to 30
Oiless Rotary Dampers
These dampers provide damp-
ing torque from 0.1 up to
3Nm, damping in one or both
directions. Having no pivot
axis allows the installation of
multiple units together to
increase the damping torque.
MC 30
320% more Energy
Absorption Capacity
for Greater Productivity
With the weight of only10 gm,
the MC 30 provides energy
capacity of 3.5Nm and covers
an effective weight range
from 0.4 up to15kg.
N
E
W
p
a
g
e
1
9
N
E
W
p
a
g
e
2
7
N
E
W
p
a
g
e
7
7
N
E
W
p
a
g
e
8
5
ACE-Katalog_2004_UK_003-007 18.08.2004 10:32 Uhr Seite 3
Major Customers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
Index
56 - 59
60 - 63
64 - 67
68
69
SCS-33 to 64
SCS-38 to 63
CB-63 to 160
Operating instructions
Application examples
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11 - 12
13 - 15
16 - 17
Page
106 - 108
109 - 117
118 - 119
120 - 121 NEW
122 - 125
126
127
128
129
130
131
92 - 93
94 - 95 NEW
95
96 - 97
98 - 103
104
105
VC 25
FA, MA and MVC
DVC
HB-15 to 70
TD-28 and TDE-28
70 - 71
72 - 73
74 - 75
76 - 77 NEW
78 - 79
80
81
World leader in motion control
Editorial
Major customers
Unbeatable range
Unbeatable range
Technical support
Function of shock absorbers
Conventional damping systems
Comparison of design and function
Formulae and calculations
Capacity chart
All products from one source
Free of charge
Made from one piece
170 models
MC 9 to 600
SC 190 to 925
SC
2
-Series
MA 30 to 900
Accessories M6 to M25
Mounting, installation & app. examples
MAGNUM-Series
Air/Oil tanks and installation hints
Special shock absorbers
CA 2 to 4 and A1
1
/2 to 3
Installation examples
High service life
Low strain on machines
Innovative technology
Continuously adjustable
New areas of application
High-capacity
Shortest cycle times
Suited for clean room technology
Low profile
Useful hints
Maximum stroke length
Customised performance
Robust and self-contained
Compact design
Soft contact characteristics
For crane equipment
Production safety
Miniature
Medium-damping torque
High-damping torque
Compact design
Adjustable
Low profile design
Precision feed controls
Easy to mount
Dual feed speed
Long stroke adjustable damper
Door dampers
Fully adjustable
Pull type gas springs
Lockable
Easy installation
Suited for clean room
technology
18 - 21 NEW
22 - 23
24 - 25
26 - 27 NEW
28 - 30
31 - 33
34 - 44
45 - 46
47
48 - 53
54 - 55
82 - 83
84
85 NEW
86 NEW
87
88
89 - 91
FRT-E2 and FRT-G2
FRT/FRN-C2 and -D2
FRT/FRN-K2, FRT/FRN-F2 and FFD
FYN-N1 and FYN-K1
FYT/FYN-H1 and -LA3
FDT and FDN
Calculations and application examples
Function, calculation & mounting tips
GS-8 to 70
GZ-19 to 28
GBF-28 and GBS-28
Acc's for gas springs & feed controls
Industrial gas springs/stainless steel
Calculation formulae
Gate closure gas springs
Local contacts
Technical & sales contact numbers
TA 12 to 116
TS 14 to 107
TR 29 to 100
TR-L 29 to 188
TC 64 to 176
Profile dampers overview
General
Industrial Shock
Absorbers
Rotary Dampers
Hydraulic Dampers
and Feed Controls
Industrial Gas Springs
TUBUS-Profile Dampers
An Unbeatable Range
Finest Available
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
6
www.ace-controls.co.uk
Increase production Reduce wear & tear Minimise down time Save money
TUBUS Bumpers
Increase safety Minimise risk Prevent damage Reduce repair costs Peace of mind
Increase safety Compact size Prevent damage Special Elastomer Peace of mind
Sizes from
12 to 176 mm dia.
Stroke lengths from
5 to 198 mm
Sizes from
33 to 230 mm dia.
Stroke lengths from
25 to 1200 mm
Sizes from
6 to 190 mm dia.
Stroke lengths from
5 to 406 mm
7
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
An Unbeatable Range
Finest Available
Hydraulic Dampers and Feed Controls
Increase safety Fingertip control Reduce operator effort Gain Peace of mind
Rotary Dampers
Increased control Improved product finish Reduce running costs Increase accuracy
Controlled rotary motion High quality damping Low cost Improved Feel of product
Sizes from
10 to 80 mm Body dia.
Rotary damping
about 105 to 360
Sizes from
Stroke lengths from
20 to 1000 mm
Sizes from
Stroke lengths from
8 to 800 mm
Technical Support
Finest Available
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
8
Up-to-date, Product Information, News, Technical
Advice, Application Enquiry E-mail Service and
Local Distributor Contact Details
Online Shock Absorber
Selection Program
2D & 3D CAD Viewer
In-house Shock Absorber Unique Application
Simulation Service
Shock Absorber
Selection Program
In-house Gas Spring Application Geometry &
Selection Service
Virtually all manufacturing processes involve movement of some kind.
In production machinery this can involve linear transfers, rotary index
motions, fast feeds etc. At some point these motions change direction
or come to a stop.
Any moving object possesses kinetic energy as a result of its motion and
if the object changes direction or is brought to rest, the dissipation of this
kinetic energy can result in destructive shock forces within the structural
and operating parts of the machine.
Kinetic energy increases as the square of the speed and the heavier the
object, or the faster it travels, the more energy it has. An increase in pro-
duction rates is only possible by dissipating this kinetic energy smoothly
and thereby eliminating destructive deceleration forces.
Older methods of energy absorption such as rubber buffers, springs,
hydraulic dashpots and cylinder cushions do not provide this required
smooth deceleration characteristic they are non linear and produce
high peak forces at some point during their stroke.
The optimum solution is achieved by an ACE industrial shock absorber.
This utilises a series of metering orifices spaced throughout its stroke
length and provides a constant linear deceleration with the lowest
possible reaction force in the shortest stopping time.
ACE Controlled Linear Deceleration
ACE demo showing a wine glass dropping
free fall 1.3 m. Decelerated by an ACE shock
absorber not a drop of wine is spilled.
Stopping with Rubber Buffers, Springs,
Dashpots or Cylinder Cushions
Stopping with ACE Shock Absorbers
Result:
Benefits:
Loss of Production
Machine Damage
Increased Maintenance Costs
Increased Operating Noise
Higher Machine Construction
Costs
Increased Production
Increased Operating Life
of the Machine
Improved Machine Efficiency
Reduced Construction Costs
of the Machine
Reduced Maintenance Costs
Reduced Noise Pollution
Reduced Energy Costs
Raw Material
Production
Finished Product
ACE Shock Absorber
ACE Shock Absorber
Raw Material
Production
Rubber Buffer
Finished
Product
Scrap
Shock Absorber Function
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
9
Comparison of Damping Systems
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
10
t
t
Q
Q
1. Hydraulic Dashpot (High stopping force at start of the stroke).
With only one metering orifice the moving load is abruptly slowed down
at the start of the stroke. The braking force rises to a very high peak at the
start of the stroke (giving high shock loads) and then falls away rapidly.
2. Springs and Rubber Buffers (High stopping forces at end of stroke).
At full compression. Also they store energy rather than dissipating it,
causing the load to rebound back again.
3. Air Buffers, Pneumatic Cylinder Cushions (High stopping force at end of
stroke). Due to the compressibility of air these have a sharply rising force
characteristic towards the end of the stroke. The majority of the energy is
absorbed near the end of the stroke.
4. ACE Industrial Shock Absorbers (Uniform stopping force through the
entire stroke). The moving load is smoothly and gently brought to rest
by a constant resisting force throughout the entire shock absorber stroke.
The load is decelerated with the lowest possible force in the shortest
possible time eliminating damaging force peaks and shock damage
to machines and equipment. This is a linear deceleration force stroke
curve and is the curve provided by ACE industrial shock absorbers.
In addition they considerably reduce noise pollution.
Assumption:
Same maximum reaction force.
Result:
The ACE shock absorber can
absorb considerably more energy
(represented by the area under
the curve).
Benefit:
By installing an ACE shock
absorber production rates can
be more than doubled without
increasing deceleration forces or
reaction forces on the machine.
Assumption:
Same energy absorption
(area under the curve).
Result:
The reaction force transmitted
by the ACE shock absorber is
very much lower.
Benefit:
By installing the ACE shock
absorber the machine wear and
maintenance can be drastically
reduced.
Assumption:
Same energy absorption.
Result:
The ACE shock absorber
stops the moving load in a
much shorter time.
Benefit:
By installing an ACE shock
absorber cycle times are reduced
giving much higher production
rates.
Energy Capacity Reaction Force (Stopping Force) Stopping Time
Force
(N)
Force
(N)
Stopping Stroke Stopping Stroke Stopping Time
Hydraulic
Dashpot
Hydraulic
Dashpot
ACE Shock Absorber
v
(m/s)
ACE Shock Absorber
Hydraulic
Dashpot
Comparison
ACE Shock Absorber
Stopping Stroke
Hydraulic
Dashpot
ACE Industrial Shock Absorbers
Pneumatic
Cylinder
Cushions
S
t
o
p
p
i
n
g

F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
Springs - or
Rubber Buffers
Comparison of Design and Function
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
11
ACE Design for Higher Demands
ACE Piston Tube Technology:
The increased volume of displaced hydraulic oil provides
200 % more energy absorption capacity in comparison
with the standard design. The wider effective weight
range enables these dampers to cover a much wider
range of applications. The piston and inner tube are
combined into a single component.
ACE Rolling Diaphragm System:
By the proven dynamic ACE rolling diaphragm seal
system the shock absorber becomes hermetically sealed
and provides up to 25 million cycles. The rolling dia-
phragm seal allows direct installation into the end cover
of pneumatic cylinders (up to 7 Bar).
These technologies are used separately or combined on
the MC 150 M to MC 600 M and SC
2
25 M to SC
2
650 M
model ranges.
Standard Design of ACE Miniature Shock Absorbers
These miniature shock absorbers have a static pressure
chamber. The dynamic piston forces the hydraulic oil
to escape through the metering orifices.
The displaced oil is absorbed by the accumulator.
A static seal system containing a U-cup and a wiper
seals the shock absorber internally.
The outer body and the pressure chamber are fully
machined from solid with closed rear end.
P = 400 bar P = 400 bar P = 400 bar P = 400 bar P = 0 bar
* The load velocity reduces continuously as you travel through the stroke due to the reduction in the number of metering
orifices (*) in action. The internal pressure remains essentially constant and thus the Force vs. stroke curve remains linear.
F = Force (N)
P = Internal pressure (bar)
s = Stroke (m)
t = Deceleration time (s)
v = Velocity (m/s)
Accumulator U-Cup/Rod Wiper
Piston O-Ring
Pressure Chamber Piston Tube Rolling Diaphragm Seal
*4
*0
n
n
n
n
*3
n
n
*2
n
*1
n
n
n
v = 2 m/s v = 1,5 m/s v = 1 m/s v = 0,5 m/s v = 0 m/s
F/ P
v
s / t t
Comparison of Design
General Function
Built in Safety
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
12
Industrial shock absorbers and automobile braking systems have
two crucial functional similarities:
1. Both should bring a moving mass quickly and safely to rest
without any recoil or bounce back.
2. Both must never suddenly fail without warning.
ACE industrial shock absorbers are built to the highest
quality. Shock absorber bodies and inner pressure
chambers are fully machined from solid high tensile
alloy steel. This gives a completely closed end
one-piece pressure chamber with no seals or
circlips being necessary.
The advantage of this design concept
is that the ACE shock absorber is able
to withstand much higher internal
pressures or overload without
damage, giving a very high safety
margin. The chance of a sudden
failure due to overload etc.
is effectively ruled out.
Self-Compensating Industrial Shock Absorbers
are maintenance free, self-contained hydraulic devices
with multiple metering orifices which extend through the
complete stroke length.
After the moving load contacts the shock absorber the
piston moves gently back creating an immediate pressure
rise in the pressure chamber. The hydraulic oil behind the
piston can initially escape through all the metering orifices.
The number of metering orifices in action decreases
proportionally to the distance travelled through the stroke.
The impact velocity of the moving load is smoothly redu-
ced. The internal pressure and thus the reaction force (Q)
remain essentially constant thoughout the complete stroke
length providing a constant deceleration rate or:
Linear Deceleration
Shock Absorber Body massively built
one-piece body with closed rear end.
Fully machined from solid steel to ensure
total reliability.
Pressure Chamber made from high tensile
steel, hardened and nitrided. Fully machined
from solid with closed rear end to withstand
internal pressures up to 1000 Bar.
Piston Rod high
tensile steel hardened
and corrosion resistant.
Seals only one dynamic seal.
Hermetically sealed rolling diaphragm
sealing system.
Bearing maintenance free,
and self-lubricating.
Piston made from powdered metal,
self-lubricating and friction free,
with integral piston check valve.
Serving as integral positive stop.
Formulae and Calculations
Free Computer Selection Software Available See Page 131
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
13
Example
m = 100 kg
v = 1,5 m/s
c = 500 /hr
s = 0.05 m (chosen)
Example
m = 20 kg
v = 1 m/s
M = 50 Nm
R = 0.5 m
L = 0.8 m
c = 1500 /hr
s = 0.012 m (chosen)
Example
m = 800 kg
v = 1.2 m/s
ST = 2.5
P = 4 kW
c = 100 /hr
s = 0.1 m (chosen)
Example
m = 36 kg
*v = 1.5 m/s
F = 400 N
c = 1000 /hr
ACE shock absorbers provide linear deceleration and are therefore
superior to other kinds of damping element.
It is easy to calculate around 90 % of applications knowing only the
following 5 parameters:
*v or
v
D
is the final impact velocity of the mass. With accelerating
motion the final impact velocity can be 1.5 to 2 times higher than the
average. Please take this into account when calculating kinetic energy.
In all the following examples the choice of shock absorbers made
from the capacity chart is based upon the values of (W
3
), (W
4
),
(me) and the desired shock absorber stroke (s).
Key to symbols used
W
1
Kinetic energy per cycle Nm
W
2
Propelling force energy per cycle Nm
W
3
Total energy per cycle (W
1
+ W
2
) Nm
W
4
Total energy per hour (W
3
c) Nm/hr
me Effective weight kg
m Mass to be decelerated kg
n Number of shock absorbers (in parallel)
*v Velocity of moving mass m/s
*
v
D
Impact velocity at shock absorber m/s
v
Angular velocity rads/s
F Propelling force N
c Cycles per hour 1/hr
P Motor power kW
1. Mass to be decelerated (weight) m (kg)
2. Impact velocity at shock absorber
v
D
(m/s)
3. Propelling force F (N)
4. Cycles per hour c (/hr)
5. Number of absorbers in parallel n
ST** Stall torque factor (normally 2.5) 1 to 3
M Propelling torque Nm
I Moment of Inertia kgm
2
g Acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s
2
h Drop height excl. shock absorber stroke m
s Shock absorber stroke m
L/R/r Radius m
Q Reaction force N
m Coefficient of friction
t Deceleration time s
a Deceleration m/s
2
a Side load angle
b Angle of incline
**ST =
^
relation between starting torque and running torque of the motor (depending on the design)
2.1 for vertical motion upwards
2.2 for vertical motion downwards
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0,5
W
2
= 0
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
me = m
W
1
= 100 1.5
2
0.5 = 113 Nm
W
2
= 0
W
3
= 113 + 0 = 113 Nm
W
4
= 113 500 = 56500 Nm/hr
Chosen from capacity chart:
Model MC 3350 M-2 self-compensating
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0,5
W
2
= F s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
W
2
= (F m g) s
W
2
= (F+ m g) s
W
1
= 36 1.5
2
0.5 = 41 Nm
W
2
= 400 0.025 = 10 Nm
W
3
= 41 + 10 = 51 Nm
W
4
= 51 1000 = 51000 Nm/hr
me = 2 51 : 1.5
2
= 45 kg
Model MC 600 M self-compensating
*v is the final impact velocity of the mass: With pneu-
matically propelled systems this can be 1.5 to 2 times the
average velocity. Please take this into account when
calculating energy.
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.5 = 0.5 I v
2
W
2
=
M s
R
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D =
v R
= v R
L
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
W
1
= 20 1
2
0.5 = 10 Nm
W
2
= 50 0.012 : 0.5 = 1.2 Nm
W
3
= 10 + 1.2 = 11.2 Nm
W
4
= 11.2 1500 = 16800 Nm/hr
v
D
= 1 0.5 : 0.8 = 0.63 m/s
me = 2 11.2 : 0.63
2
= 56 kg
Model MC 150 MH self-compensating
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0,5
W
2
=
1000 P ST s
v
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
W
1
= 800 1.2
2
0.5 = 576 Nm
W
2
= 1000 4 2.5 0.1: 1.2 = 834 Nm
W
3
= 576 + 834 = 1410 Nm
W
4
= 1410 100 = 141 000 Nm/hr
me = 2 1410 : 1.2
2
= 1958 kg
Check the side load angle, tan a = s/R, with regard to Max.
Side Load Angle in the capacity chart (see example 6.2)
Note: Do not forget to include the rotational energy of motor, coupling and
gearbox into calculation for W
1
.
Example
m = 250 kg
v = 1.5 m/s
c = 180 /hr
(Steel/Steel) m = 0.2
s = 0.05 m (chosen)
W
1
= 250 1.5
2
0.5 = 281 Nm
W
2
= 250 0.2 9.81 0.05 = 25 Nm
W
3
= 281 + 25 = 306 Nm
W
4
= 306 180 = 55080 Nm/hr
me = 2 306 : 1.5
2
= 272 kg
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0,5
W
2
= m m g s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
1 Mass without propelling force
2 Mass with propelling force
3 Mass with motor drive
4 Mass on driven rollers
5 Swinging mass
with propelling torque
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
14
Q =
1.5 W
3
s
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.18 = 0.5 I v
2
W
2
=
F r s
=
M s
R R
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D =
v R
= v R
L
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
m = 1000 kg
v = 2 m/s
F = 7000 N
M = 4200 Nm
s = 0.05 m (chosen)
r = 0.6 m
R = 0.8 m
L = 1.2 m
c = 900 /hr
W
1
= 1000 2
2
0.18 = 720 Nm
W
2
= 7000 0.6 0.05 : 0.8 = 263 Nm
W
3
= 720 + 263 = 983 Nm
W
4
= 983 900 = 884 700 Nm/hr
v
D
= 2 0.8 : 1.2 = 1.33 m/s
me = 2 983 : 1.33
2
= 1111 kg
Model CA 2 x 2 - 1 self-compensating
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.5
W
2
= m g s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
m = 6000 kg
v = 1.5 m/s
s = 0.305 m(chosen)
c = 60 /hr
W
1
= 6000 1.5
2
0.5 = 6750 Nm
W
2
= 6000 9.81 0.305 = 17952 Nm
W
3
= 6750 + 17952 = 24702 Nm
W
4
= 24702 60 = 1482 120 Nm/hr
me = 2 24702 : 1.5
2
= 21957 kg
Model CA 3 x 122 self-compensating
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.18 = 0.5 I v
2
W
2
=
M s
R
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D =
v R
= v R
L
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
I = 56 kgm
2
v = 1 rad/s
M = 300 Nm
L = 1.5 m
R = 0.8 m
c = 1200 /hr
W
1
= 0.5 56 1
2
= 28 Nm
W
2
= 300 0.025 : 0.8 = 9 Nm
W
3
= 28 + 9 = 37 Nm
W
4
= 37 1200 = 44400 Nm/hr
v
D
= 1 0.8 = 0.8 m/s
me = 2 37 : 0.8
2
= 116 kg
Model MC 600 M self-compensating
Reaction force Q (N)
Deceleration rate a (m/s
2
)
a =
0.75
v
D
2
s
Approximate values assuming correct adjustment. Add safety margin if necessary.
(Exact values will depend upon actual application data and can be provided on request.)
Formulae
W
1
= m g h
W
2
= m g s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= 2 g h
me =
2 W
3
V
D
2
Example
m = 30 kg
h = 0.5 m
c = 400 /hr
s = 0.05 m (chosen)
W
1
= 30 0.5 9.81 = 147 Nm
W
2
= 30 9.81 0.05 = 15 Nm
W
3
= 147 + 15 = 162 Nm
W
4
= 162 400 = 64 800 Nm/hr
v
D
= = 3.13 m/s 2 9.81 0.5
me =
2 162
= 33 kg
3.13
2
Formulae
W
1
= m g h = m v
D
2
0.5
W
2
= m g sinb s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= 2 g h
me =
2 W
3
V
D
2
W
2
= (F m g sinb) s
W
2
= (F + m g sinb) s
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.25 = 0.5 I v
2
W
2
=
M s
R
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
=
v R
= v R
L
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
m = 1000 kg
v = 1.1 m/s
M = 1000 Nm
s = 0.05 m (chosen)
L = 1.25 m
R = 0.8 m
c = 100 /hr
W
1
= 1000 1.1
2
0.25 = 303 Nm
W
2
= 1000 0.05 : 0.8 = 63 Nm
W
3
= 303 + 63 = 366 Nm
W
4
= 366 100 = 36600 Nm/hr
v
D
= 1.1 0.8 : 1,25 = 0.7 m/s
me = 2 366 : 0.7
2
= 1494 kg
t =
2.6 s
v
D
Stopping time t (s)
Free falling mass 6
6.1 Mass rolling/sliding down
incline
7 Rotary index table with
propelling torque
8 Swinging arm with
propelling torque
(uniform
weight
distribution)
9 Swinging arm with propelling
force (uniform weight distribution)
6.2
10 Mass lowered at control-
led speed
6.1 a propelling force up incline
6.1 b propelling force down incline
Note: Formulae
given are only
valid for
circular table
with uniform
weight
distribution.
tan a =
s
R
Mass free falling about Side load angle from shock absorber axis
a pivot point
Calculation as
per example 6.1
except W
2
= 0
W
1
= m g h
v
D
= 2 g h
.
R
L
The effective weight (me) can either be the same as the actual weight (Examples A and C), or it can be an imaginary weight representing
a combination of the propelling force or lever action plus the actual weight (Examples B and D).
Note: When using several shock absorbers in parallel, the values W
3
, W
4
and me are divided according to the number of units used.
Example:
m = 100 kg
F = 2000 N
v
D
= v = 2 m/s
s = 0.1 m
W
1
= 200 Nm
W
2
= 200 Nm
W
3
= 400 Nm
me =
2 400
= 200 kg
4
Example:
m = 20 kg
v = 2 m/s
v
D
= 0.5 m/s
W
1
= W
3
= 40 Nm
me =
2 40
= 320 kg
0.5
2
Example:
m = 20 kg
v
D
= v = 2 m/s
W
1
= W
3
= 40 Nm
me =
2 40
= 20 kg
2
2
Formula
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Formula
me = m
Example:
m = 100 kg
v
D
= v = 2 m/s
W
1
= W
3
= 200 Nm
me =
2 200
= 100 kg
4
me = m
Example
m = 5000 kg
v = 2 m/s
c = 10 /hr
F = 3500 N
Formulae
W
1
=
m
1
m
2
(v
1
+v
2
)
2
0.5
(m
1
+m
2
)
W
2
= F s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D
= v
1
+ v
2
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
m
1
= 7000 kg
v
1
= 1.2 m/s
c = 20 /hr
m
2
= 10000 kg
v
2
= 0.5 m/s
F = 5000 N
W
1
=
700010000
1.7
2
0.5 = 5 950 Nm
(7000+10000)
W
2
= 5000 0.127 = 635 Nm
W
3
= 5950 + 635 = 6585 Nm
W
4
= 6585 20 =131 700 Nm/hr
v
D
= 1.2 + 0.5 = 1.7 m/s
me = 2 6585 : 1.7
2
= 4 557 kg
Formulae
W
1
=
m
1
m
2
(v
1
+v
2
)
2
0.5
(m
1
+m
2
)
W
2
= F s
W
3
=
W
1
+ W
2
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D =
v
1 +
v
2
2
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Example
m
1
= 7000 kg
v
1
= 1.2 m/s
c = 20 /hr
m
2
= 10000 kg
v
2
= 0.5 m/s
F = 5000 N
W
1
=
700010000
1.7
2
0.5 = 5 950 Nm
(7000+10000)
W
2
= 5000 0.100 = 500 Nm
W
3
= (5950 : 2) + 500 = 3475 Nm
W
4
= 3475 20 = 69 500 Nm/hr
v
D
= (1.2 + 0.5) : 2 = 0.85 m/s
me = 2 3475 : 0.85
2
= 9 619 kg
Effective weight (me)
W
1
= 5000 2
2
0.25 = 5 000 Nm
W
2
= 3500 0.150 = 525 Nm
W
3
= 5000 + 525 = 5525 Nm
W
4
= 5525 10 = 55 250 Nm/hr
v
D
= 2 : 2 = 1 m/s
me = 2 5525 : 1
2
= 11 050 kg
Formula
me = m
Formulae
W
1
= m v
2
0.25
W
2
= F s
W
3
= W
1
+ W
2
W
4
= W
3
c
v
D =
v
2
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
Formula
me =
2 W
3
v
D
2
19 Wagon against 2 shock absorbers
Wagon against wagon 20
Wagon against wagon
2 shock absorbers
21
A Mass without propelling force
C Mass without propelling force
direct against shock absorber
D Mass without propelling force
with mechanical advantage
B Mass with propelling force
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
15
Shock Absorber Capacity Chart
Self-Compensating Shock Absorbers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
16
Capacity Chart
MC 9 M-1-B 5 1 0.6 - 3.2 19
MC 9 M-2-B 5 1 0.8 - 4.1 19
MC 10 ML-B 5 0.5 0.3 - 2.7 19
MC 10 MH-B 5 0.8 0.7 - 5 19
MC 30 M-1 8 3.5 0.4 - 1.9 19
MC 30 M-2 8 3.5 1.8 - 5.4 19
MC 30 M-3 8 3.5 5 - 15 19
MC 25 ML 6 2.8 0.7 - 2.2 19
MC 25 M 6 2.8 1.8 - 5.4 19
MC 25 MH 6 2.8 4.6 - 13.6 19
MC 75 M-1 10 9 0.3 - 1.1 19
MC 75 M-2 10 9 0.9 - 4.8 19
MC 75 M-3 10 9 2.7 - 36.2 19
MC 150 M 12 20 0.9 - 10 21
MC 150 MH 12 20 8.6 - 86 21
MC 150 MH2 12 20 70 - 200 21
MC 225 M 12 41 2.3 - 25 21
MC 225 MH 12 41 23 - 230 21
MC 225 MH2 12 41 180 - 910 21
MC 600 M 25 136 9 - 136 21
MC 600 MH 25 136 113 - 1130 21
MC 600 MH2 25 136 400 - 2300 21
SC 25 M-5 8 10 1 - 5 25
SC 25 M-6 8 10 4 - 44 25
SC 25 M-7 8 10 42 - 500 25
SC 75 M-5 10 16 1 - 8 25
SC 75 M-6 10 16 6.8 - 78 25
SC 75 M-7 10 16 75 - 800 25
SC 190 M-0 16 25 0.7 - 4 23
SC 190 M-1 16 25 1.4 - 7 23
SC 190 M-2 16 25 3.6 - 18 23
SC 190 M-3 16 25 9 - 45 23
SC 190 M-4 16 25 23 - 102 23
SC 190 M-5 12 31 2 - 16 25
SC 190 M-6 12 31 13 - 140 25
SC 190 M-7 12 31 136 - 1550 25
SC 300 M-0 19 33 0.7 - 4 23
SC 300 M-1 19 33 1.4 - 8 23
SC 300 M-2 19 33 4.5 - 27 23
SC 300 M-3 19 33 14 - 82 23
SC 300 M-4 19 33 32 - 204 23
SC 300 M-5 15 73 11 - 45 25
SC 300 M-6 15 73 34 - 136 25
SC 300 M-7 15 73 91 - 181 25
SC 300 M-8 15 73 135 - 680 25
SC 300 M-9 15 73 320 - 1950 25
SC 650 M-0 25 73 2.3 - 14 23
SC 650 M-1 25 73 8 - 45 23
SC 650 M-2 25 73 23 - 136 23
SC 650 M-3 25 73 68 - 408 23
SC 650 M-4 25 73 204 - 1180 23
SC 650 M-5 23 210 23 - 113 25
SC 650 M-6 23 210 90 - 360 25
SC 650 M-7 23 210 320 - 1090 25
SC 650 M-8 23 210 770 - 2630 25
SC 650 M-9 23 210 1800 - 6350 25
SC 925 M-0 40 110 4.5 - 29 23
SC 925 M-1 40 110 14 - 90 23
SC 925 M-2 40 110 40 - 272 23
SC 925 M-3 40 110 113 - 726 23
SC 925 M-4 40 110 340 - 2088 23
MC 3325 M-0 25 155 3 - 11 36
MC 3325 M-1 25 155 9 - 40 36
MC 3325 M-2 25 155 30 - 120 36
MC 3325 M-3 25 155 100 - 420 36
MC 3325 M-4 25 155 350 - 1420 36
MC 3350 M-0 50 310 5 - 22 36
MC 3350 M-1 50 310 18 - 70 36
MC 3350 M-2 50 310 60 - 250 36
MC 3350 M-3 50 310 210 - 840 36
MC 3350 M-4 50 310 710 - 2830 36
MC 4525 M-0 25 340 7 - 27 38
MC 4525 M-1 25 340 20 - 90 38
MC 4525 M-2 25 340 80 - 310 38
MC 4525 M-3 25 340 260 - 1050 38
MC 4525 M-4 25 340 890 - 3540 38
MC 4550 M-0 50 680 13 - 54 38
MC 4550 M-1 50 680 45 - 180 38
MC 4550 M-2 50 680 150 - 620 38
MC 4550 M-3 50 680 520 - 2090 38
MC 4550 M-4 50 680 1800 - 7100 38
MC 4575 M-0 75 1020 20 - 80 38
MC 4575 M-1 75 1020 70 - 270 38
MC 4575 M-2 75 1020 230 - 930 38
MC 4575 M-3 75 1020 790 - 3140 38
MC 4575 M-4 75 1020 2650 - 10600 38
MC 6450 M-0 50 1700 35 - 140 40
MC 6450 M-1 50 1700 140 - 540 40
MC 6450 M-2 50 1700 460 - 1850 40
MC 6450 M-3 50 1700 1600 - 6300 40
MC 6450 M-4 50 1700 5300 - 21200 40
MC 64100 M-0 100 3400 70 - 280 40
MC 64100 M-1 100 3400 270 - 1100 40
MC 64100 M-2 100 3400 930 - 3700 40
MC 64100 M-3 100 3400 3150 - 12600 40
MC 64100 M-4 100 3400 10600 - 42500 40
MC 64150 M-0 150 5100 100 - 460 40
MC 64150 M-1 150 5100 410 - 1640 40
MC 64150 M-2 150 5100 1390 - 5600 40
MC 64150 M-3 150 5100 4700 - 18800 40
MC 64150 M-4 150 5100 16000 - 63700 40
CA 2 x 2-1 50 3600 700 - 2200 51
CA 2 x 2-2 50 3600 1800 - 5400 51
CA 2 x 2-3 50 3600 4500 - 13600 51
CA 2 x 2-4 50 3600 11300 - 34000 51
CA 2 x 4-1 102 7200 1400 - 4400 51
CA 2 x 4-2 102 7200 3600 - 11000 51
CA 2 x 4-3 102 7200 9100 - 27200 51
CA 2 x 4-4 102 7200 22600 - 68000 51
CA 2 x 6-1 152 10800 2200 - 6500 51
CA 2 x 6-2 152 10800 5400 - 16300 51
CA 2 x 6-3 152 10800 13600 - 40800 51
CA 2 x 6-4 152 10800 34000 - 102000 51
CA 2 x 8-1 203 14500 2900 - 8700 51
CA 2 x 8-2 203 14500 7200 - 21700 51
CA 2 x 8-3 203 14500 18100 - 54400 51
CA 2 x 8-4 203 14500 45300 - 136000 51
CA 2 x 10-1 254 18000 3600 - 11000 51
CA 2 x 10-2 254 18000 9100 - 27200 51
CA 2 x 10-3 254 18000 22600 - 68000 51
CA 2 x 10-4 254 18000 56600 - 170000 51
CA 3 x 5-1 127 14125 2900 - 8700 52
CA 3 x 5-2 127 14125 7250 - 21700 52
CA 3 x 5-3 127 14125 18100 - 54350 52
CA 3 x 5-4 127 14125 45300 - 135900 52
CA 3 x 8-1 203 22600 4650 - 13900 52
CA 3 x 8-2 203 22600 11600 - 34800 52
CA 3 x 8-3 203 22600 29000 - 87000 52
CA 3 x 8-4 203 22600 72500 - 217000 52
CA 3 x 12-1 305 33900 6950 - 20900 52
CA 3 x 12-2 305 33900 17400 - 52200 52
CA 3 x 12-3 305 33900 43500 - 130450 52
CA 3 x 12-4 305 33900 108700 - 326000 52
CA 4 x 6-3 152 47500 3500 - 8600 53
CA 4 x 6-5 152 47500 8600 - 18600 53
CA 4 x 6-7 152 47500 18600 - 42700 53
CA 4 x 8-3 203 63300 5000 - 11400 53
CA 4 x 8-5 203 63300 11400 - 25000 53
CA 4 x 8-7 203 63300 25000 - 57000 53
CA 4 x 16-3 406 126500 10000 - 23000 53
CA 4 x 16-5 406 126500 23000 - 50000 53
CA 4 x 16-7 406 126500 50000 - 115000 53
Nm per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
Model
Part number
Self-Compensating
min kg max
Page
Effective Weight me Energy Capacity
Nm per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
Model
Part number
Self-Compensating
min kg max
Page
Effective Weight me Energy Capacity
Shock Absorber Capacity Chart
Adjustable Shock Absorbers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
17
Capacity Chart
MA 30 M 8 3.5 5650 0.3 - 15 27
FA 1008 VD-B 8 1.8 3600 0.2 - 10 27
MA 50 M 7 5.5 5100 4.5 - 20 27
MA 35 M 10 4 6000 5.9 - 57 27
MA 150 M 12 22 35000 1 - 109 27
MA 225 M 19 25 45000 2.3 - 226 27
MA 600 M 25 68 68000 9 - 1360 27
MA 900 M 40 100 90000 14 - 2040 27
MA 3325 M 25 170 75000 9 - 1730 36
ML 3325 M 25 170 75000 300 - 50000 36
MA 3350 M 50 340 85000 13 - 2500 36
ML 3350 M 50 340 85000 500 - 80000 36
MA 4525 M 25 390 107000 40 - 10000 38
ML 4525 M 25 390 107000 3000 - 110000 38
MA 4550 M 50 780 112000 70 - 14500 38
ML 4550 M 50 780 112000 5000 - 180000 38
MA 4575 M 75 1170 146000 70 - 15000 38
ML 6425 M 25 1020 124000 7000 - 300000 40
MA 6450 M 50 2040 146000 220 - 50000 40
ML 6450 M 50 2040 146000 11000 - 500000 40
MA 64100 M 100 4080 192000 270 - 52000 40
MA 64150 M 150 6120 248000 330 - 80000 40
A 11/2x2 50 1800 632000 195 - 32000 50
A 11/2x3 1/2 89 3200 633000 218 - 36000 50
A 11/2x5 127 4500 904000 227 - 41000 50
A 11/2x6 1/2 165 5900 1180000 308 - 45000 50
A 2x2 50 3600 1100000 250 - 32000 51
A 2x4 102 9000 1350000 230 - 72500 51
A 2x6 152 13500 1600000 260 - 86000 51
A 2x8 203 19200 1900000 260 - 90000 51
A 2x10 254 23700 2200000 320 - 113000 51
A 3x5 127 15800 2260000 480 - 154000 52
A 3x8 203 28200 3600000 540 - 181500 52
A 3x12 305 44000 5400000 610 - 204000 52
Max. Energy Capacity Nm
W
4
per Hour
Self Contained
per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
Model
Part number
Adjustable
min kg max
Page
Effective Weight me
Miniature Shock Absorbers MC 9 to MC 75
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
18
18
Impact velocity range: 0.5 to 5 m/s
(0.15 to 1.8 m/s for MC 9M)
Ensure that effective weight of application is within the
range of the unit chosen.
(Special range units available on request.)
Materials: Steel body with black oxide finish. Hardened
stainless steel piston rod. Locknut MC 9: Aluminium
W
4
capacity rating (max. energy per hour Nm/hr):
If your application exceeds the tabulated W
4
figures
consider additional cooling i. e.
cylinder exhaust air etc. Ask
ACE for further details.
Mounting: In any position. If
precise end position datum is
required consider use of the
optional stop collar type AH.
Operating temperature range:
0C to 65C.
On request: the MC Series are
available with Weartec finish
(seawater resistant) or other
special finishes.
Elastomer
Insert
Piston Rod
Positive Stop
Rod Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
Slot
Return Spring
ACE Miniature Shock Absorbers
are maintenance free, self-contained
hydraulic components. The model
range MC 9 to MC 75 have a very
short overall length and a low return
force. The shock absorber is filled
with a temperature stable oil and has
an integrated positive stop. They are
ideally suited for small, fast handling
equipment, rotary actuators, pick and
place mechanisms and similar small
automation equipment. A wide choice
of metering hardnesses enable these
units to cover applications with effec-
tive weights ranging from 0.3 kg to
36 kg effective weight.
New: MC30M-series
with thread size M8.
Increased energy capacity
by 320% compared with
the previous design!
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
19
Available without rod end button and with shortened piston rod on request (add suffix -NB)
Part Number MC . . .
4,1 3
Hub
!2,5 2
SW 10
8
40,9
!6,4
M8x1
13,1
2,5
5
Hub
! 3,2 3
SW 14
10
52
!
7,6
M12x1
18
5 3
5
Hub
!3,2 3
SW 12
6,6
43
!7,6
M10x1
14,6
4 5 SW 5
AF10
Stroke
AF12 AF5
Stroke
AF14
Stroke
Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 28 to 32.
Rectangular Flange Mounting Block
Rectangular Flange Clamp Mount
AH Stop Collar BV Side Load Adaptor PB Steel Shroud AS Stop Collar incl Proximity Switch
Mounting, installation see pages 28 to 32.
2,5 2,5
Hub
2
SW8
5
26
M6x0,5
10
2,7
!4,8
!2
N
E
W
Capacity Chart
Effective Weight me Max. Energy Capacity Nm
per Hour
W
4
per Cycle
W
3
Return Force
N
Rod Reset
Time
s
*Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
Type
Self-Compensating
min kg max
MC 9 M-1-B 1.0 2000 0.6 - 3.2 1.38 - 3.78 0.3 2 0.005
MC 9 M-2-B 1.0 2000 0.8 - 4.1 1.38 - 3.78 0.3 2 0.005
MC 10 ML-B 0.5 4000 0.3 - 2.7 2.00 - 4.00 0.6 3 0.010
MC 10 MH-B 0.8 4000 0.7 - 5.0 2.00 - 4.00 0.6 3 0.010
MC 30 M-1 3.5 5600 0.4 - 1.9 0.9 - 4.45 0.3 2 0.010
MC 30 M-2 3.5 5600 1.8 - 5.4 0.9 - 4.45 0.3 2 0.010
MC 30 M-3 3.5 5600 5 - 15 0.9 - 4.45 0.3 2 0.010
MC 25 ML 2.8 22500 0.7 - 2.2 3.00 - 6.00 0.3 2 0.020
MC 25 M 2.8 22500 1.8 - 5.4 3.00 - 6.00 0.3 2 0.020
MC 25 MH 2.8 22500 4.6 - 13.6 3.00 - 6.00 0.3 2 0.020
MC 75 M-1 9.0 28200 0.3 - 1.1 4.00 - 9.00 0.3 2 0.030
MC 75 M-2 9.0 28200 0.9 - 4.8 4.00 - 9.00 0.3 2 0.030
MC 75 M-3 9.0 28200 2.7 - 36.2 4.00 - 9.00 0.3 2 0.030
* With higher side load angles install BV side load adaptor see page 28 and 31.
MC 30 M for use on new installations MC 10 M-B still available in future
MC 25 M RF 10 MB 10 SC
2
MC 75 M RF 12 MB 12
MC25 M to MC75 M only
AF8
Stroke 20
10
3
Breite
8 mm
M6x0,5
M3
12
20
10
5
M6x0,5
14
M3x8
MC 9 M-B
MB 6 SC
2
RF 6
Thickness
8 mm
28
14
6
M10x1
20
M4x10
32
16
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
M5
20
32
20
6
M12x1
24
M5x12
Thickness
12 mm
MC30 M to MC75 M only MC30 M to MC75 M only
25
14
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M10x1
M4
16
Thickness
10 mm
5 3
Hub
!2 2
SW 10
5
28,5
!4,8
M8x1
10
2 AF10
Stroke
M8x0,75 also available to order
Miniature Shock Absorber MC 150 to MC 600
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
20
20
Impact velocity range 0.08 to 6 m/s (ensure that effective
weight of application is within range of unit selected.
(Special range units available on request.)
Materials: Steel body with black oxide finish. Hardened
stainless steel piston rod. Rolling diaphragm seal: EPDM
(Note seal not compatible with petroleum based fluids. If
unit to be used in contact with such fluids specify neoprene
rolling seal or use air bleed adaptor Type SP or consider
model from SC range on pages 22 to 25.
W
4
If your application exceeds
tabulated W
4
figures
consider additional cooling
i. e. cylinder exhaust air etc.
Ask ACE for assistance.
Mounting: In any position. If
precise end position datum is
Operating temperature
range: 0C to 66C.
On request: Stainless Steel
outer body. Weartech finish
(seawater resistant). Other
finishes available to special
order.
hydraulic components. The hermeti-
cally sealed rolling diaphragm seal
system used on the MC 150 to MC 600
model range provides the highest
possible cycle lifetime; up to 25 million
cycles being achievable.
The rolling diaphragm seal also provi-
des an extremely low rod return force.
These models can be directly moun-
ted into the end cover of pneumatic
cylinders (up to 7 Bar) to provide
superior end damping compared to
normal cylinder cushions. All models
incorporate an integral positive stop.
By adding the optional Side Load
Adaptor it is possible to accept side
loads up to 30 from the axis. The
wide range of models available
ensure a seamless range of ope-
ration on applications with effective
weights ranging from 0.9 kg up
to 2300 kg by selecting the
appropriate model.
Piston Rod
Outer Body
Rod Bearing
Rolling Diaphragm Seal
Diaphragm Locator
Internal
Hex Socket
O-Ring
Piston with Integral
Positive Stop
Pressure
Chamber with
Metering
Orifices
Rolling diaphragm seal system -
up to 25 million cycles
possible!
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
21
M25x1,5 7,3 10 SW30
25,4
Hub
!
8
110,3 32
SW10
M20x1,5 7,2
79,2
SW23
12,5
17,5
Hub
!
6,3
8 SW8
M14x1,5 7,2 6 SW17 12,5
Hub
!
4,8
69,1 17,5
SW6
MC 150 M PP 150 RF 14 MB 14
MC 600 M PP 600 RF 25 MB 25
Part Number MC . . .
Capacity Chart
per Hour
W
4
per Cycle
W
3
Return Force
N
Rod Reset
Time
s
*Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
Type
Self-Compensating
min kg max
MC 150 M 20 34000 0.9 - 10 3 - 5 0.4 4 0.06
MC 150 MH 20 34000 8.6 - 86 3 - 5 0.4 4 0.06
MC 150 MH2 20 34000 70 - 200 3 - 5 0.4 4 0.06
MC 225 M 41 45000 2.3 - 25 4 - 6 0.3 4 0.15
MC 225 MH 41 45000 23 - 230 4 - 6 0.3 4 0.15
MC 225 MH2 41 45000 180 - 910 4 - 6 0.3 4 0.15
MC 600 M 136 68000 9 - 136 5 - 9 0.6 2 0.26
MC 600 MH 136 68000 113 - 1130 5 - 9 0.6 2 0.26
MC 600 MH2 136 68000 400 - 2300 5 - 9 0.6 2 0.26
* For applications with higher side load angles consider using the Side Load Adaptor (BV) pages 29 to 31.
MC 225 M PP 225 RF 20 MB 20
M27x3 also available to special order
Stroke
AF17 AF6
AF23 AF8
Stroke
Stroke
AF30 AF10
BV Side Load Adaptor PB Steel Shroud AH Stop Collar SP Air Bleed Collar PS Steel Button
AS Switch Stop Collar
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
Thickness
12 mm
Thickness
20 mm
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Thickness
25 mm
Nylon Button
W
3
max =14 Nm
12 !
6 10
4,8 !
Nylon Button
W
3
max = 33 Nm
17 !
5 9
6,3 !
Nylon Button
W
3
max = 68 Nm
23 !
7 12
8 !
Miniature Shock Absorbers SC 190 to SC 925
Soft-Contact and Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
22
22
Impact velocity range: 0.15 to 3.7 m/s (check selection
calculations on pages 10 & 11 and effective weight ranges
on following page). Special range units available on
request.
Materials: Steel body with black oxide finish. Piston rod
hardened stainless steel.
W
4
capacity rating (max. energy per hour Nm/hr): If your
application exceeds tabulated W
4
figures consider additio-
nal cooling i. e. cylinder exhaust air etc.
Mounting: In any position.
If precise end position datum
is required consider use of the
0C to 66C.
On request: Weartec finish
(seawater resistant) other
special finishes available to
special order.
Piston Rod
Positive Stop
Rod Seals
Main Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Fully Threaded Outer Body
Pressure Chamber
with Metering Orifices
Return Spring
Piston Check Valve
hydraulic components. The SC-Series
provide dual performance benefits.
They provide soft contact decelera-
tion where initial impact reaction for-
ces are very low with the advantages
of self-compensation to cope with
changing input energy conditions
without adjustment. They have long
stroke lengths (SC 925 with 40 mm
Superstroke) to provide smooth dece-
leration and low reaction forces. They
have an integral mechanical stop and
are ideal for use on handling equip-
ment, linear transfers, rodless cylin-
ders and pneumatic pick and place sy-
stems etc. The overlapping operating
ranges enable the SC Series to handle
effective weights ranging 0.7 kg up to
2088 kg. With the optional side load
adaptor fitted they can cope
with side loads up to 30. The SC
series units are fully interchangeable
with the adjustable MA range pro-
viding customer choice.
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
Miniature Shock Absorbers SC 190 to SC 925
Soft-Contact and Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
23
! 4
4,6
!12 M14x1,5 7 SW12 6 SW17
16
Hub
87,7 27
! 4,8
4,6
!17 M20x1,5 7 SW18 8
87,4
SW23
19
30
Hub
! 6,3
4,6
!23 M25x1,5 7 SW23 10
106,6
SW30
25,4
36,4
Hub
! 6,3
4,6
! 23 M25x1,5 7 SW23 10
138
SW30
40
51
Hub
Available without Rod End Button on request. Mounting, installation see pages 29 to 32.
Capacity Chart
Max. Energy Capacity Nm Effective Weight me
per Hour
W
4
per Cycle
W
3
Return Force
N
Rod Reset
Time
s
*Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
Type
Soft-Contact
min kg max
Self-Compensating
min kg max
SC 190 M-0 25 34000 --- - --- 0.7 - 4 4 - 9 0.25 5 0.08
SC 190 M-1 25 34000 2.3 - 6 1.4 - 7 4 - 9 0.25 5 0.08
SC 190 M-2 25 34000 5.5 - 16 3.6 - 18 4 - 9 0.25 5 0.08
SC 190 M-3 25 34000 14 - 41 9 - 45 4 - 9 0.25 5 0.08
SC 190 M-4 25 34000 34 - 91 23 - 102 4 - 9 0.25 5 0.08
SC 300 M-0 33 45000 --- - --- 0.7 - 4 5 - 10 0.10 5 0.11
SC 300 M-1 33 45000 2.3 - 7 1.4 - 8 5 - 10 0.10 5 0.11
SC 300 M-2 33 45000 7 - 23 4.5 - 27 5 - 10 0.10 5 0.11
SC 300 M-3 33 45000 23 - 68 14 - 82 5 - 10 0.10 5 0.11
SC 300 M-4 33 45000 68 - 181 32 - 204 5 - 10 0.10 5 0.11
SC 650 M-0 73 68000 --- - --- 2.3 - 14 11 - 32 0.20 5 0.31
SC 650 M-1 73 68000 11 - 36 8 - 45 11 - 32 0.20 5 0.31
SC 650 M-2 73 68000 34 - 113 23 - 136 11 - 32 0.20 5 0.31
SC 650 M-3 73 68000 109 - 363 68 - 408 11 - 32 0.20 5 0.31
SC 650 M-4 73 68000 363 - 1089 204 - 1180 11 - 32 0.20 5 0.31
SC 925 M-0 110 90000 8 - 25 4.5 - 29 11 - 32 0.40 5 0.39
SC 925 M-1 110 90000 22 - 72 14 - 90 11 - 32 0.40 5 0.39
SC 925 M-2 110 90000 59 - 208 40 - 272 11 - 32 0.40 5 0.39
SC 925 M-3 110 90000 181 - 612 113 - 726 11 - 32 0.40 5 0.39
SC 925 M-4 110 90000 544 - 1952 340 - 2088 11 - 32 0.40 5 0.39
AF12
Stroke
AF17
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
AF18 AF23
AF23 AF30
AF23 AF30
SC 190 M
M26x1,5 also available to special order
Part Number SC . . . MB 14
SC 300 M MB 20
SC 650 M MB 25
M14x1 and M16x1 also available to special order
M22x1,5 also available to special order
AH Stop Collar BV Side Load Adaptor PB Steel Shroud AS Switch Stop Collar
SC 925 M MB 25
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
Thickness
20 mm
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Thickness
25 mm
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Thickness
25 mm
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
RF 25
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
RF 25
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
RF 14
RF 20
Heavyweight Shock Absorbers SC
2
- Series
Series 2 Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
24
24
Impact velocity range: 0.09 to 5.7 m/s (check effective
weight operating range.)
Materials: Shock absorber body and accessories: Steel with
black oxide finish (SC 25 to SC 190) or nitride hardened
(SC 300 and SC 650). Piston
rod: hardened stainless steel.
If precise end position datum
is required consider use of the
0C to 66C.
(seawater resistant). Other
special order.
Rolling Diaphragm
Seal
Self-Retaining
Main Bearing
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Return Spring
Piston Check Valve
The ACE Heavyweight Series 2 are
maintenance-free, self-contained hy-
draulic components. The design of the
Heavyweight Series 2 units combines
the piston and inner tube into a single
component and provides more than
double the energy capacity of pre-
vious units in the same envelope size.
They also have a fully integrated me-
chanical stop. The smaller sizes up to
type SC
2
190, have a dynamic mem-
brane seal which allows direct instal-
lation into the end cover of pneumatic
cylinders. (For end position damping
max. 7 Bar) The greatly increased
energy capacity coupled with overlap-
ping effective weight ranges covering
from1 kg up to 6 350 kg makes the
Series 2 units ideal for a wide range
of handling equipment and rotary
actuators. With the optional Side Load
Adaptor fitted they can cope with side
loads of up to 30 degrees.
Piston Rod
with Integrated
Positive Stop
Combined piston and
inner tube increased
energy capacity up to
300%!
Heavyweight Shock Absorbers SC
2
25 to 650
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
25
25
4,6
!23 M25x1,5 7 SW23 10
106
SW30
23
34
Hub
!9,6
Stroke
AF30 AF23
SC 650 M
Part Number SC . . .
! 6,4
4,6
!17 M20x1,5 7 SW18 8
79,5
SW23
15
26
Hub
AF18 AF23
Stroke
SC 300 M
Rectangular Flange
RF 20
RF 25
Rectangular Flange
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
Thickness
20 mm
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
32
16
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
Thickness
25 mm
Mounting Block
Mounting Block
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
!4,8
M14x1,5 5 SW10 6
78
SW17 12
17
Hub
AF10 AF17
Stroke
SC 190 M
Rectangular Flange
RF 14
Mounting Block
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
!4
M12x1 4 SW8 5
78
SW14 10
14
Hub
AF8 AF14
Stroke
SC 75 M
Rectangular Flange
RF 12
Mounting Block
32
20
6
M12x1
24
M5x12
25
14
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M10x1
M4
16
Thickness
10 mm
Rectangular Flange
RF 10
Mounting Block
MB 10 SC
2
c/w KM 10 SC
2
Locknut
28
14
6
M10x1
20
M4x10
!3,15
M10x1 5 SW7 4
72
SW12 8
11
Hub
AF7 AF12
Stroke
SC 25 M
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
Capacity Chart
SC 25M 10 16000 1 - 5 4 - 44 42 - 500 4.5 - 14 0.3 2 0.03
SC 75M 16 30000 1 - 8 7 - 78 75 - 800 6 - 19 0.3 2 0.045
SC 190M 31 50000 2 - 16 13 - 140 136 - 1550 6 - 19 0.4 2 0.06
SC 300M 73 45000 11 - 45 34 - 136 91 - 181 135 - 680 320 - 1950 8 - 18 0.2 5 0.15
SC 650M 210 68000 23 - 113 90 - 360 320 - 1090 770 - 2630 1800 - 6350 11 - 33 0.3 5 0.35
soft hard
*Max. Side
Return Force Rod Reset Load
Type per Cycle per Hour 5 6 7 8 9 N Time Angle Weight
W
3
W
4
min kgmax min kg max min kg max min kg max min kg max min max s o kg
Controls International Belvedere Road Newton-le-Willows WA12 0JJ Tel 01925 227171 Fax 01925 229323 E-mail info@ace-controls.co.uk
AH Stop Collar BV Side Load Adaptor PB Steel Shroud AS Switch Stop Collar
Note: Locknut KM ... SC2 must be used with Stop Collar AH ...
& MB ... SC2 in high velocity applications
MB 12 SC
2
c/w KM 12 SC
2
Locknut
MB 20 SC
2
c/w KM 20 SC
2
Locknut
MB 25 SC
2
c/w KM 25 SC
2
Locknut
MB 14 SC
2
c/w KM 14 SC
2
Locknut
Miniature Shock Absorbers MA
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
26
26
Adjustment: On models MA 30 up to MA150: by turning
the adjustment screw at rear. On the larger sizes: by
turning the adjustment knob against the scale marked
0 to 9. After installation, cycle the machine a few times
and turn the adjustment knob until optimum deceleration
is achieved (i. e. smooth deceleration throughout stroke).
Hard impact at start of stroke Turn adjuster towards 9
Hard setdown at end of stroke Turn adjuster towards 0
Impact velocity range: 0.3 to 3.6 m/s (check effective
weight calculation.): FA units max. 2 m/s.
hardened stainless steel.
W
4
If your application exceeds tabulated W
4
figures consider
additional cooling i. e. cylinder
exhaust air etc.
If precise end position datum is
Install a mechanical stop 0.5 to
1 mm before end of stroke on
FA 1008.
0C to 66C.
(seawater resistant) other
special order.
Piston Rod
Positive Stop
Rod Seals
Main Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Adjustment
Knob
Pressure
and
Adjustment
Chamber
Return Spring
Metering Orifices
Piston Check Valve
hydraulic components. If you prefer a
fully adjustable shock absorber rather
than a self-compensating model on
your application then the MA Series
provide a directly interchangeable
alternative. The adjustable series
include an integrated mechanical stop
from the Model MA 225 upwards.
These adjustable units have long
stroke lengths (MA 925 with 40 mm
Superstroke) to provide smooth de-
celeration and low reaction forces.
The MA 150 incorporates the proven
rolling diaphragm seal (used on the
MC 150 to MC 600 range) and shares
all the advantages of that technol-
ogy. The stepless adjustment
range of the MA Series covers
an effective weight range from
0.2 kg up to 2040 kg.
NEW: MA 30 M and MA 50 M
with thread size M8 and M10.
Highest energy capacity and
compact design!
Miniature Shock Absorbers FA and MA
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
27
25
12
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M8x1
M4
16
Thickness
10 mm
32
16
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
!4,8
4,7
!12 M14x1,5 7,5 SW12 6
70
SW17
12,5
22,5
Hub
Einstellschraube
! 4,8
4,6
!17
M20x1,5 13,5 SW18 8
88
SW23
19
30
Hub
! 6,3
4,6
!23
M25x1,5 16,5 SW23 10
106,6 (138)
SW30
25,4 (40)
36,4 (51)
Hub
5 Hub SW 14
10
66 18
! 3,2
!7,7 M12x1
5
Einstellschraube
Capacity Chart
per Hour
W
4
per Cycle
W
3
Return Force
N
Rod Reset
Time
s
*Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
Type
Adjustable
min kg max
MA 30 M 3.5 5650 0.23 - 15 1 - 5 0.3 2 0.025
FA 1008 VD-B 1.8 3600 0.2 - 10 3 - 6 0.3 2.5 0.026
MA 50 M 5.5 5100 4.5 - 20 3 - 6 0.3 2 0.030
MA 35 M 4 6000 5.9 - 57 5 - 11 0.2 2 0.043
MA 150 M-B 22 35000 1.0 - 109 3 - 5 0.4 5 0.06
MA 225 M 25 45000 2.3 - 226 5 - 10 0.1 2 0.13
MA 600 M 68 68000 9 - 1360 10 - 30 0.2 2 0.31
MA 900 M 100 90000 14 - 2040 10 - 35 0.4 1 0.40
Available without rod end button on request. Models MA 600 M/MA 900 M available with clevis mounting (see page 30).
Adjuster screw
Part Number FA, MA . . .
MA 30 M
Rectangular Flange Mounting Block Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 28 to 32.
Rectangular Flange Clamp Mount Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 29 to 32.
MA 225 M RF 20 MB 20
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
AF14
AF12 AF17
AF18 AF23
AF23 AF30
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
Thickness
20 mm
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Thickness
25 mm
MA 150 M RF 14 MB 14
MA 35 M RF 12 MB 12
MA 50 M FA 1008 VD-B
RF 8 MB 8 SC
2
MA 600 M and MA 900 M RF 25 MB 25
Adjuster screw
3 Hub SW 10
8
48 13,1
! 3,2
!6,4 M8x1
4,1
Einstellschraube
Stroke
AF10
Adjuster screw
Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 28 to 32. Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 28 to 32.
25
14
6
M8x1
18
M4x10
32
20
6
M12x1
24
M5x12
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
4
Hub
SW 12
7
50 14,9
! 3,2
!7,7 M10x1
5,1
Einstellschraube
Stroke
AF12
Adjuster screw
N
E
W
in
A
p
ril 2
0
0
5
N
E
W
4 Hub SW 12
8
51
M10x1
14,5
!2,5
!6
11
AF12 Stroke
M14x1 available
to special order.
MA 600 ML with M27x3
available to special order.
Shock Absorber Accessories M6 to M12
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
28
M6x0,5 / M8x1
* for M8x1 Dimensions in ( )
20(25)
10
(12)
3(3,5)
Breite
8(10) mm
M6x0,5(8x1)
M3(4)
12(16)
Mounting Block
Locknut Stop Collar
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 30 M-880, BV 8 A
for MC 10 M-880 available on
request
M6x0,5
(8x1)
8(10)
12
6
!
6(8) !
15
10
10
SW9
SW10
8
11 !
M 8x1
4 !
Steel Shroud
for MC 30 M-880, PB 8 A
for MC 10 M-880 available on
request
!12
2,6 !
2
12,7
17,5
M6x0,5(8x1)
3
SW8(10)
M10x1
25
14
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M10x1
M4
16
Stop Collar
Rectangular Flange
M10x1
12,5
20
10
!
10 !
8,8 !
5
8
3,2 !
Steel Button
for MC 25 M-880, PS 10 SC
for SC
2
25 M available on
request
M10x1
17
22
12
!
15
Switch Stop Collar
inc. Proximity Switch
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 25 M-880, BV 10 SC
for SC
2
25 M available on
request
Steel Shroud
for MC 25 M-880, PB 10 SC
for SC
2
25 M available on
request
!14
3,2 !
3
14
22
M12x1
32
16
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
M5
20
Clamp Mount
not for SC
2
75
Locknut Stop Collar
Rectangular Flange
M12x1
15
20
10
!
12 !
32
20
6
M12x1
24
M5x12
10,8 !
5
8
3,2 !
Steel Button
for MC 75 M-880, PS 12 SC
for SC
2
75 M available on
request
M12x1
19
22
12
!
16
Switch Stop Collar
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 75 M-880, BV 12 SC
for SC
2
75 M available on
request
22
12
18
SW13
SW14
10
15 !
M12x1
7 !
!16
3,2 !
3
15
23
M12x1
5
SW14
AF8(10)
Thickness
8 (10) mm
AF10
AF9
Thickness
10 mm
28
14
6
M10x1
20
M4x10
15
11
12
SW11
SW12
6,5
13 !
M10x1
6 !
AF12
AF14
Thickness
12 mm
AF13
AF14
RF 10 AH 10
Locknut
M10x1
4
SW12 AF12
KM 10
BV 10
PB 10 PS 10
AS 10
M8x1
15
20
12
!
12
Switch Stop Collar
AS 8
RF 12 MB 12 AH 12 KM 12
BV 12
PB 12 PS 12 AS 12
BV 8
MB 10 SC
2
Steel Shroud
for MC 75 M-880, PB 12 SC
for SC
2
75 M available on
request
PB 8
20 (25)
10 (14)
5 (6)
M6x0,5 (8x1)
14 (18)
M3x8
(M4x10)
Rectangular Flange
KM 6/ *KM 8
AF11
AH 6/*AH 8 MB 6 SC
2
/*MB 8 SC
2
RF 6/*RF 8
Universal Mount
38
25
5
Breite
12 mm
M10x1
4,5
25
!
Thickness
12 mm
UM 10
Universal Mount
38
25
5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
4,5
25
!
Thickness
12 mm
UM 12
Mounting Block
Shock Absorber Accessories M14 to M20
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
29
M14x1,5
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
Locknut Stop Collar
Rectangular Flange
M14x1,5
17
20
12
!
SW15
14 !
Nylon Button
for MC 150 M
and MA 150 M
12 !
6 10
4,8 !
M14x1,5
6
SW17
M14x1,5
21
22
12
!
17
Switch Stop Collar
Steel Shroud
PB 14 for MA 150 M, MC 150 M
and SC
2
190 M 57
Steel Button
for MC150 M, MA150 M
and SC
2
190 M 57
Steel Button
for MC 225 M
12 !
4,5
11
4,8 !
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
Clamp Mount
not for SC
2
300 M 59
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
Rectangular Flange
Locknut Stop Collar
M20x1,5
8
SW23
M20x1,5
24,8
25
12
!
SW22
20,5 !
!18
4,8 !
4,5
15
25
Steel Shroud
PB 14 SC for SC 190 M 04-880
!18
4 !
4,5
22
32
M20x1,5
Nylon Button
for MC 225 M
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 225 M
M20x1,5
!
24
24
14
!
12
20
SW22
SW23
12,5
M20x1,5
26
25
12
!
20
Switch Stop Collar
Steel Shroud
PB 20 for MC 225 M
!24
6,3 !
4
15
24
Steel Shroud
PB 20 SC for SC 300 M 09
and MA/MVC 225 M-880
!24
4,8 !
5
26
37
16,8 !
4,4
11
6,3 !
17 !
5 9
6,3 !
AF17
AF15
Thickness
12 mm
AF23
AF22
Thickness
20 mm
AF22
AF23
PS 20 AS 20 PB 20 SC PB 20
PP 225
BV 20
Air Bleed Collar
for MC 225 M
24 !
5,4 12
M20x1,5
SW18
3 !
AF18
SP 20
MB 20 AH 20 KM 20
PB 14 PB 14 SC PS 14 AS 14
18 !
5,5 10
M14x1,5
SW12
3 !
Air Bleed Collar
for MC 150 M,
SC
2
190 M 57 and
MA 150 M
AF12
SP 14
Side Load Adaptor
for SC 190 M 04-880
M14x1,5
!
18
30
14
!
9
26
SW16
SW17
16
BV 14 SC
KM 14 AH 14 MB 14 RF 14
M20x1,5
!
24
36
14
!
12
32
SW22
SW23
19
Side Load Adaptor
for SC 300 M 0-4-880, MA/
MVC 225 M-880 and SC 300
2
M 5-9-880
AF22
AF23
BV 20 SC
AF17
AF16
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 150 M, MA 150 M
and SC
2
190 M 57
M14x1,5
!
18
24
12
!
9
20
SW16
SW17
12,5
BV 14
AF17
AF16
RF 20
PP 150
Universal Mount
45
29
5
Breite
16 mm
M14x1,5
4,5
35
!
Thickness
16 mm
UM 14
47
35
10
Breite
16 mm
M20x1,5
5,5
35
!
25,5
Universal Mount
Thickness
16 mm
UM 20
Clamp Mount
not for SC
2
190 M 57
Shock Absorber Accessories M25
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
30
M25x1,5
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Clamp Mount
not for SC
2
650 M 59
Locknut Stop Collar
Rectangular Flange
M25x1,5
30
32
16
!
SW27
25 !
30 !
6,4 16
M25x1,5
SW23
3 !
Nylon Button
for MC 600 M
Side Load Adaptor
for MC 600 M
23 !
7 12
8 !
M25x1,5
!
30
44
16
!
16
38
SW27
SW30
25
Side Load Adaptor
for SC 650 M 0-4-880, MA/
MVC 600 M-880 and SC
2
650 M 59
Air Bleed Collar
for MC 600 M
M25x1,5
!
30
44
16
!
16
38
SW27
SW30
25
M25x1,5
10
SW30
AS 25
M25x1,5
32
25
12
!
23
Switch Stop Collar
PB 25
Steel Shroud
PB 25 for MC 600 M
and SC
2
650 M 59
Installation:
1. Warm standard button and
remove from shock absorber.
2. Mount CF 25/CFC 25 and lock
in place.
3. Thread on CR or CRA to body
and adjust centre to centre length.
4. Lock CR or CRA in place.
5. Mechanical stops must be fitted at
both ends of travel. (approx. 0.5 to
1mm before end of stroke).
PS 25
Steel Button
PS 25 for MC 600 M
23 !
6,4
11
8 !
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
!29
8 !
4,5
32
43
PB 25 SC
Steel Shroud
PB 25 SC for SC 650 M 04-880
and MA/MVC 600 M-880
!29
6,3 !
4,5
32
43
14
5
14
!
5
8
20
8 breit 30 ! Sicherungsschraube
SC 650 M = max 160 - min 135
SC 925 M = max 205 - min 165
** MC 600 M= max 165 - min 140
8 breit 5 !
5
9
8 7
6,3 !
+0,1 +0,1 **( 8) !
!
8
20
MA 600 M = max 160 - min 135
MA 900 M = max 205 - min 165
10
30
8
15
Thickness
25 mm
AF27
AF30
AF27
AF30
AF27
AF30
AF23
8 thick Locking Screw 8 thick
Rear Clevis
for SC 650 M, SC 925 M and MC 600 M
Front Clevis
CF 25 for SC 650 M and SC 925 M
**CFC 25 for MC 600 M
Rear Clevis
for MA/MVC 600 M and MA/MVC 900 M
Front Clevis
for MA 600 M and MA 900 M
KM 25
BV 25 SC SP 25
CF 25
**CFC 25
CR 25
MB 25 RF 25 AH 25 PP 600
BV 25
CF 25 CRA 25
Universal Mount
47
35
10
Breite
16 mm
M25x1,5
5,5
35
25,5
!
Thickness
16 mm
UM 25
When using the MB Clamp mount no lock nut is needed on the
shock absorber (split clamp action). The mounting block is very
compact and allows fine adjustment of the shock absorber
position by turning in and out.
Two socket head screws are included with clamp mount block.
When foot mounting the types with combined piston and inner
tube SC
2
HW 25 to SC
2
HW 650 and the types MC 9 M, MC 30 M,
MC 25 M and MA 30 M, the NEWMB10, 12, 14, 20, 25 (SC
2
) must
be used.
Mounting and Installation Hints
Up to M25x1.5
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
31
Formulae:
Example:
s = 0.025 m a max = 25 (Type BV25)
R
s
= 0.1 m
( )
a = tan
-1
a = 7.13
0.025
2 0,1
R
smin
=
s
2 tanamax
R
smin
=
R
smin
= 0.027 m
0.025
2 tan 25
Problem:
Rotating impact motion causes high
side load forces on the piston rod. This
increases bearing wear and possibly
results in rod breakage or bending.
Solution:
Install Side Load Adaptor BV. If possible
halve the impact angle as shown.
The BV adaptor can only be installed onto
a shock absorber without rod end button.
To order shock absorber without button
add suffix -880 to part number.
(Note: Models MA 150 M, MC 150 M to
MC 600 M and SC
2
25 M to SC
2
190 M 5-7
are supplied as standard without buttons.)
To remove button from existing absorber:
Clamp the shock absorber in mounting
block and warm button carefully. Grip the
button with pliers and pull off along rod
axis.
a = side load angle
a max = max. angle
s = absorber stroke m
R
s
= mounting radius m
R
smin
= min. possible
mounting radius m
= =
Rs
s Hub
"
Side Load Adaptor
NOTE: The BV adaptor can only be installed on shock absorbers without rod end button.
With side load impact angles of more
than 3 the operating lifetime of the
shock absorber reduces rapidly due
to increased wear of the rod bearings.
The optional BV side load adaptor
provides a long lasting solution.
Material: Threaded body and plunger:
Hardened high tensile steel
BV secured onto the Shock Absorber!
Plunger
Clamp Slot design
not for use with
SC
2
HW 25 to HW 650
Positive Stop
Shock Absorber
Stop Collar
Clamp Mount/
Mounting Block
All ACE miniature shock absorbers have an integral positive stop.
An optional stop collar (AH...) can be added if desired to give fine
adjustment of final stopping position.
The Rectangular Flange provides a space saving convenient
assembly and does not need a lock nut to hold the shock absorber.
Therefore achieving a neat, compact and flat surface mounting.
BV; BV SC
MB
AH
KM
Hub
AH
Festanschlag
Hub
s
a = tan
-1
2 R
s
( )
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Positive Stop
AH KM
Rs
Threaded
Body
Type Screw Size Max. Torque Type Screw Size Max. Torque
RF6 M3x8 3 Nm RF14 M5x12 6 Nm
RF8 M4x10 4 Nm RF20 M6x14 11 Nm
RF10 M4x10 4 Nm RF25 M6x14 11 Nm
RF12 M5x12 6 Nm
Type Screw Size Max. Torque Type Screw Size Max. Torque
MB10 M4x14 4 Nm MB20 M6x25 11 Nm
MB12 M5x16 6 Nm MB25 M6x30 11 Nm
MB14 M5x20 6 Nm
RF Rectangular Flange
Up to M25x1.5
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
32
Air Bleed Collar (includes integral stop collar) protects shock absorber
from ingress of abrasive contaminants like cement, paper or wood dust
into the rod seal area. It also prevents aggressive fluids such as cutting
oils, coolants etc. damaging the seals. Air bleed supply 0.5 to 1 bar.
Low air consumption. The constant air bleed prevents contaminants
passing the wiper ring and entering the shock absorber seal area.
Note: Do not switch off air supply whilst machine is operating!
Warning: The air bleed collar can not be used on all similar body thread
sized shock absorbers. The air bleed collar is only for types MC150 M to
MC 600 M, MA150 M and SC
2
190 M 5-7.
Stodmpfer
Abstreifring
!3
Air Bleed Collar SP
SP Air bleed collar
Steel Shroud Grinding beads, sand, welding splatter, paints and adhesives etc. can
adhere to the piston rod. They then damage the rod seals and the shock
absorber quickly fails. In many cases the installation of the optional
steel shroud can provide worthwhile protection and increase lifetime.
Note: When installing dont forget to allow operating space for the
shroud to move as the shock absorber is cycled.
For part numbers MA, MC, SC please order withM -880 sufix.
Part numbers MA 150 M, MC 150 M to MC 600 M and SC
2
25 M to
SC
2
190 M 5-7 are supplied without a button, for advice on removing
the button see page 31.
PNP Proximity Switch Data
Supply voltage: 10 - 27 VDC
Ripple < 10%
Load current max: 100 mA
Operating temperature range: -10C to +60C
Residual voltage: max. 1 V
Protection: IP67 (IEC 144) with LED-Indicator
Proximity Switch N/Open when shock absorber extended.
When shock absorber is fully compressed switch closes
and LED Indicator lights.
Steel Button,
Switch Stop Collar
The new ACE StopLight limit switch combination can
be mounted on all popular shock absorber models.
Features: Very short, compact mounting package.
Good Price/Performance combination.
Can be fitted to standard shock absorber.
Fine adjustment of stroke/signal is possible.
The steel button type PS is fitted as standard on the
Models: SC 190 M 0-4, SC 300 M 0-9, SC 650 M 0-9,
SC 925 M 0-4, MA/MVC 225 M, MA/MVC 600 M and
MA/MVC 900 M.
With all other models you must order the PS button as
an optional accessory.
Mounting: We recommend to fix the steel button onto the
end of the piston rod using Loctite 290. Attention! Take
care not to leave any adhesive on the piston rod as this
will cause seal damage. Thread the Switch Stop Collar
onto the front of the shock absorber and secure in posi-
tion. Switch cable should not be routed close to power ca-
bles.
PS
AS
PB
250-3 PNP
Circuit diagram PNP-switch
Prox.
main
circuit
Load
max.
100mA
Red
LED
black
blue
brown
+V
OV
PB
Hub
Hub
Stodmpfer
max 1 mm
PS
Hub
AS 8 breit
20
7,5
10 5,5
2,5
3 !
ca. 1000
Lnge
M 2,5
Stroke
8 thick
Length
App. 1000
Stroke
Stroke
Shock absorber
Wiper ring
Shock absorber
AS inc. Proximity switch PNP
250-3 PNP
Proximity Switch
PB Steel shroud
AS PS
Soft end-of-travel damping
on rotary movements
Constant resisting force
ACE Miniature Shock Absorbers have a distinctly
better damping characteristic than air cushions.
This pneumatic linear module for high precision, high
speed motion intentionally abandoned pneumatic
end-of-travel damping. The compact miniature shock
absorbers of the type MC-25MH-NB decelerate the
linear motion safer and faster when reaching the end-
of-travel position. They accept the moving load gently
and decelerate it smoothly throughout the entire stroke
length.
Additional advantages: simpler construction, smaller
pneumatic valves, lower maintenance costs as well as
reduced compressed air consumption.
ACE Miniature Shock Absorbers optimise production
with minimum expenditure.
The cycle rate for an assembly line producing electronic
components was increased to 3600 units/hr by using
ACE shock absorbers. Miniature shock absorbers type
SC-190M1 decelerate the rapid transfer movements on
the production line and using soft damping methods
optimise the pick up and set down of the components.
This soft deceleration technique has increased produc-
tion and reduced maintenance on the portal and rotary
actuator modules. The optional side load adaptor pro-
tects the shock absorber from high side load forces
and increases the operating lifetime.
Using ACE shock absorbers reduces maintenance
costs by 50 % and running costs by 20 %, diminishing
energy consumption.
Miniature Shock Absorber in linear pneumatic module
Optimalised production in the electronics industry
Miniature Shock Absorbers
Application Examples
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
33
MC 33 to MC 64
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
34
34
Impact velocity range: 0.15 up to 5 m/s (on request
under 0.15 m/s and up to 20 m/s.)
Oil filling: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) 42cSt.
Materials: Steel with black oxide finish. Piston rod high
tensile steel, hardened and chrome plated. Rod end button
hardened steel with black oxide finish. Zinc plated or
plastic-coated return spring.
For optimum heat dissipation do not paint shock absorber.
Capacity rating: For Emergency Use only applications it is
sometimes possible to exceed the published max. capacity
ratings. Please consult ACE for further details. If your
application exceeds the tabulated W4 figures (max. energy
per hour Nm/hr) consider additional cooling. Ask ACE for
further details.
Temperature range:
-12C to 70C. For higher tem-
peratures consult ACE.
On request: plated finishes.
Weartec finish (seawater
resistant), special oils.
Mounting inside air cylinders
and other special options are
available on request.
This range of self-compensating shock
absorbers is part of the innovative
MAGNUM Series from ACE. You profit
from the enhanced product life in the
most difficult operating environments
provided by the latest seal technology,
hardened main bearing and also the
integrated positive stop. You achieve
50% more Energy absorption capacity
and a much wider range of effective
weight capability (between 3 kg and
63700 kg!). This offers you the capa-
bility of mounting shock absorbers
with the highest energy capacity ratings
for their size in the Industry and allows
full exploitation of your machinery
potential. You can access new possi-
bilities in machine design and con-
struction since this range offers such
features as a fully threaded outer
body and a new clamping
flange system.
Integrated Positive Stop
Main Bearing
Increased Piston Area
Hardened Piston Ring
Hardened One-Piece
Pressure Chamber
Heavy Duty
One-Piece
Steel Outer
Body
S
e
l
f
-
C
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
n
g
Membrane Accumulator
Industrial Shock Absorbers MA and ML 33 to 64
Adjustable MAGNUM Series
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
35
35
Main Bearing
Increased Piston Area
Hardened Piston Ring
Hardened One-Piece
Pressure Chamber
Heavy Duty
One-Piece
Steel Outer
Body
Locking
Screw
(MA/ML 64
only)
Impact velocity range: Type ML: 0.02 up to 0.46 m/s,
Type MA: 0.15 up to 5 m/s, (up to 20 m/s on request.)
Materials: Steel with black oxide finish. Piston rod high
tensile steel, hardened and chrome plated. Rod end button
hardened steel with black oxide finish. Zinc plated or
plastic-coated return spring.
For optimum heat dissipation do not paint shock absorber.
Capacity rating: For Emergency Use Only applications it is
sometimes possible to exceed the published max. capacity
ratings. Please consult ACE for further details. If your
application exceeds the tabulated W4 figures (max. energy
per hour Nm/hr) consider additional cooling. Ask ACE for
further details.
Adjustment: Turning the front stop collar or rear adjuster
towards 0 makes the unit
harder. Turning towards 9
makesthe unit softer.
Temperature range: -12C to
+70C. For higher tempera-
tures consult ACE.
On request: plated fin-
ishes. Weartec finish (seawa-
ter resistant), special oils.
Mounting inside air cylinders
and other special options are
available on request.
This adjustable shock absorber from
ACE is unique. The innovative
MAGNUM Series models provide the
next generation of deceleration tech-
nology to meet the needs of the future.
The latest seal technology, a hardened
main bearing and the integrated posi-
tive stop provide a significant increase
in operating lifetime. Other innovations
such as the front and rear adjuster,
new clamping flanges and the fully
threaded outer body provide many new
options in installation and mounting.
Exploit the advantages of this series
in your applications with it's 50%
increased energy capacity and a much
wider effective weight range. The
effective weight range extends from
9 kg up to 80000 kg. The MA range
models cover the majority of
standard applications, whilst the
ML range is specially designed
for low velocity/high effective
weight applications from
300 kg up to 500000 kg
effective weight.
Front Adjuster
Rear
Adjuster
Industrial Shock Absorbers MC/MA/ML 33
Self-Compensating and Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
36
!30
M33x1,5
L2 B max
!25
A max
Einstellring (nur MA und ML) Anschlag
Gewinde M36x1,5 und M42x1,5 auf Anfrage
Gewinde UNF 1 1/4-12
Einstellschraube nur MA und ML
L1 L3 10
20
max
min
8
!7
42
56
20
40
Bolzen-
sicherung
!7
22
13
5
23 !10
h9
34
14
32
48
H14
13 breit
L 6 max
! 38
13 breit
L 5 max
R 10
14
14
13 13
14
min
20
min
10
10
H8
10
H8
M 36x1.5 also available to order
Thread UNF 1 1/4-12 also available on request (Omit suffix -M from Part number)
S 33
SF 33 C 33
Clevis Mounting Kit
C 33 = 2 Clevis eyes. Delivered assembled to shock absorber.
Use positive stop at both ends of travel
Side Foot Mounting Kit
S 33 = 2 Flanges + 4 Screws M6x40, DIN 912
Tightening torque 11 Nm
Clamping torque > 90 Nm
Clevis Flange
SF 33 = Flange + 4 screws M6x20 DIN 912
Tightening torque 7.5 Nm
Conforms to: Audi + VW 39D1307/2/032, VDMA 24562 part 2
Daimler Chr. B801520023647, Opel-GM M13911673
* Nominal stroke length (without integral stop collar fitted).
Capacity Chart
*Effective Weight me Max. Energy Capacity Nm
MC 3325M 155 75000 124000 169000 3 - 11 9 - 40 30 - 120 100 - 420 350 - 1420 45 - 90 0.03 4 0.45
MC 3350M 310 85000 135000 180000 5 - 22 18 - 70 60 - 250 210 - 840 710 - 2830 45 - 135 0.06 3 0.54
MA, ML 3325M 170 75000 124000 169000 9 - 1700
300 - 50000 45 - 90 0.03 4 0.45
MA, ML 3350M 340 85000 135000 180000 13 - 2500 500 - 80000 45 - 135 0.06 3 0.54
* The effective weight range limits can be raised or lowered to special order.
** For Emergency Use Only applications it is sometimes possible to exceed the above ratings. Please consult ACE for further details.
Specifications relate to the effective stroke length (B max.).
Soft Hard
Dimensions
MC, MA, ML 3325M 25 138 23 25 60 83 68 39 168
MC, MA, ML 3350M 50 189 48.5 32 86 108 93 64 218
*Effective Weight me
Type MA
min kg max
Type ML
min kg max
Rod Max.
W
4
per hour Return Force Reset Side Load
Type **per Cycle Self- With air/ With oil -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 N Time Angle Weight
Self-Compensating W
3
contained oil tank recirculation min kgmax min kg max min kg max min kg max min kg max min max s o kg
Type *Stroke A max B max L1 min L1 max L2 L3 L5 max L6 max
Positive Stop Adjuster ring (only MA and ML)
Adjuster (only MA and ML)
13 thick
13 thick
Pin
retainer
Type
Adjustable
Because of the thread pitch
the fixing holes for the second
foot mount should only be
drilled and tapped after the
first foot mount has been
fixed in position.
Square Flange and Foot mountings do not require the use of a Locking Ring for installation (new slotted clamping system).
Ordering Example Model Type Prefix
Shock Absorber Accessories
For New Installations and Interchange Requirements
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
37
56
!37
24
42
54
41
Breite 10mm
28
7
!
12,7
19
12,7
!40
19
12,8
6,4
L1max
L1min
6,4
L4
8
!6,4
12
L6 max
7
28
!6,4
7
20,5
22
13
60
70
54
!
6,5
!39,6
44
Breite
10 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
32
6,6
M33x1,5 For use on new installations:
NM 33 QF 33
Locking Ring
!29,2
13,2 A max.
siehe Stodmpfer
PP 33
Poly Button
Side Load Adaptor
Square Flange
Steel Shroud
**Total installation length of the
shock absorber inc. steel shroud
Mounting, installation etc. see pages 32 and 43.
C 1200
S 1200
RFL 1200
Clevis Mounting (Use positive stop at both ends of travel)
Clevis Mounting Kit C 1200 (250-0323) = 1 Rear clevis flange + 1 Rod clevis + 1 Locking ring (supplied assembled to shock absorber).
Side Foot Mounting
Foot Mounting Kit S 1200 (250-0294) = 2 Rectangular flanges + 2 Side bars + 2 Locking rings + 4 Socket head screws.
Rectangular Flange
Locking ring also required
M33x1,5
Hub
23
(48,5)
48 (75)
29
(53,5)
M45x1,5
100 (128)
!30
max.
25
Hub
15 !
35 (36) !
37
25 (50)
(61,5)
**Amax 148 (198)
Clamping
slot
Stroke
Thickness 10 mm
Install with 4 machine screws with
tightening torque: = 11 Nm
Clamping torque: > 90 Nm
25 97 47,4 167
50 122 73,4 218
* Dimension can be altered.
Dimensions
Stroke L
1
* L
4
L
6 max.
thick
10 mm
Switch Stop Collar
inc. Proximity Switch and Poly
Button with elastomer insert
Optional button with
elastomer insert for
noise suppression.
Option supplied ready
mounted onto the shock
absorber. For self installation
see mounting instructions
on Page 46.
Dims. in ()
for BV 3350
see shock absorber dims.
BV 3325
BV 3350
AS 33 PB 3325
PB 3350
Stroke
Standard Models
Self-Contained with Return Spring
MC self-compensating
MA adjustable
ML adjustable, for lower impact velocity
Special Models
Air/Oil Return without Return Spring
MCA, MAA, MLA
Special Models
Air/Oil Return with Return Spring
MCS, MAS, MLS
Interchange Parts for the earlier Types MC 120
MC 3325 M-1
Self-Compensating
Thread Size M33
Stroke 25 mm
Metric Thread
(omitted when using thread UNF11/412)
Effective Weight Range Version
Dims. in ()
for PB 3350
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
38
Capacity Chart
MC 4525M 340 107000 158000 192000 7 - 27 20 - 90 80 - 310 260 - 1050 890- 3540 70 - 100 0.03 4 1.13
MC 4550M 680 112000 192000 248000 13 - 54 45 - 180 150 - 620 520 - 2090 1800- 7100 70 - 145 0.08 3 1.36
MC 4575M 1020 146000 225000 282000 20 - 80 70 - 270 230 - 930 790 - 3140 2650-10600 50 - 180 0.11 2 1.59
MA, ML4525M 390 107000 158000 192000 40 - 10000 3000 - 110000 70 - 100 0.03 4 1.13
MA, ML4550M 780 112000 192000 248000 70 - 14500 5000 - 180000 70 - 145 0.08 3 1.36
MA 4575M 1170 146000 225000 282000 70 - 15000 50 - 180 0.11 2 1.59
Dimensions
!42
M45x1,5
L2 B max
!35
A max
Gewinde UNF 1 3/4-12
MC, MA, ML 4525M 25 145 23 32 66 95 66 43 200
MC, MA, ML 4550M 50 195 48,5 40 92 120 91 68 250
MC, MA 4575M 75 246 74 50 118 145 116 93 300
Type MA
min kg max
Type ML
min kg max
L1 L3 12,5
25
max
min
16
!9
60
80
28
56
Bolzen-
sicherung
!9
27
15
6
29
!16
h9
45
21
46
65
H14
20 breit
L 6 max
! 53
20 breit
L 5 max
R 14
20
28
20 17
18
min
15
min
15
16
H8
16
H8
S 45
S 45 = 2 Flanges + 4 Screws M 8x50, DIN 912
Clevis Flange
SF 45 = Flange + 4 screws M 8x20 DIN 912
Tightening torque 7.5 Nm
Clevis Mounting Kit
20 thick
20 thick
Pin
retainer
Type
Adjustable
SF 45 C 45
fixed in position.
Thread UNF 1 3/4-12 also available on request (Omit suffix -M from Part number)
Rod Max.
**per W
4
per Hour Return Force Reset Side Load
Type Cycle Self- with Air/ with Oil -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 N Time Angle Weight
Self-Compensating W
3
Contained Oil Tank Recirculation min kgmax min kg max min kg max min kg max min kg max min max s o kg
Soft Hard
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
39
41,2
57
57
Breite 13mm
41,2
9
!
13
25,4
25,4
19
!57
26
13
!12,7
27
L6 max
13
!9,5
17,5
9,5
!55,6
56
Breite
12 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
42
9
M45x1,5 For use on new installations:
NM 45 QF 45
Side Load Adaptor
Switch Stop Collar
inc. Proximity Switch and Poly
Button with elastomer insert
Steel Shroud
Mounting, installation etc. see pages 32 and 43.
S 1400
Side Foot Mounting
Foot Mounting Kit S 1400 (250-0300) = 2 Square flanges + 2 Side bars + 2 Locking rings + 4 Socket head screws.
Square Flange
Rectangular Flange
60
76
57
Breite 13 mm
41,2
9 !
Hub
20 !
48 !
37
**Amax 154 (204,5)
25 (50)
(62,5)
6,5
13
L1max
L1min
22
6,5
L4
10
9
28,5
29,5
14
76
95
57
!
Square Flange Locking Ring
Clamping
slot
Stroke
Thickness 13 mm
Thickness 13 mm
25 89 49.5 200
50 111 77.5 250
75 136 103.5 301
Dimensions
Stroke L
1
* L
4
L
6 max.
thick
12 mm
QFL 1400 RFL 1400 C 1400
M45x1,5
Hub
23
(48,5)
52 (80)
29
(54,5)
M64x2
100 (130)
!40
max.
20
Stroke
!42
19,4 A max.
siehe Stodmpfer
PP 45
Poly Button
noise suppression.
on Page 46. see shock absorber dims.
BV 4525
BV 4550
PB 4525
PB 4550
AS 45
Dims. in ()
for BV 4550
Standard Models
MA adjustable
Special Models
MCA, MAA, MLA
Special Models
MCS, MAS, MLS
55,5
!57
30
ML4525 M
Adjustable
Thread Size M45
Stroke 25 mm
Metric Thread
Dims. in ()
for PB 4550
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
40
!60
M64x2
L2 B max
!48
A max
bei 150 Hub !60 Gewinde UNF 2 1/2-12
bei 150 Hub 60
Capacity Chart
MC 6450M 1700 146000 293000 384000 35 - 140 140 - 540 460 - 1850 1600- 6300 5300-21 200 90 - 155 0.12 4 2.90
MC 64100M 3400 192000 384000 497000 70 - 280 270 - 1100 930 - 3700 3150-12600 10 600-42 500 105 - 270 0.34 3 3.70
MC 64150M 5100 248000 497000 644000 100 - 460 410 - 1640 1390 - 5600 4700-18800 16 000-63 700 75 - 365 0.48 2 5.10
ML 6425M 1020 124000 248000 332000
7000 - 300000 120 - 155 0.06 5 2.50
MA, ML 6450M 2040 146000 293000 384000 220 - 50000 11000 - 500000 90 - 155 0.12 4 2.90
MA 64100M 4080 192000 384000 497000 270 - 52000 105 - 270 0.34 3 3.70
MA 64150M 6120 248000 497000 644000 330 - 80000 75 - 365 0.48 2 5.10
Soft Hard
Dimensions
ML 6425M 25 174 23 40 86 114 75.5 60 260
MC, MA, ML 6450M 50 225 48.5 50 112 140 100 85 310
MC, MA 64100M 100 326 99.5 64 162 191 152 136 410
MC, MA 64150M 150 450 150 80 212 241 226 187 530
Type MA
min kg max
Type ML
min kg max
Rod Max.
W
4
per Hour Return Force Reset Side
Type **per Cycle Self- with Air/ with Oil -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 N Time Load Weight
Self-Compensating W
3
Contained Oil Tank Recirculation min kg max min kg max min kg max min kg max min kg max min max s o kg
L1 L3 12,5
25
max
min
12
!11,5
78
100
40
80
Bolzen-
sicherung
!11
36
22
10
45
!20
h9
65
25
72
95
H14
24 breit
L 6 max
! 74
24 breit
L 5 max
R 20
25
35
30 30
35
min
20
min
10
20
H8
20
H8
! 50**
S 64
C 64
Clevis Mounting Kit
** with 150 mm stroke Dia. 60 mm. Order C 64/150.
S 64 = 2 Flanges + 4 Screws M10x80, DIN 912
SF 64
Clevis Flange
SF 64 = Flange + 4 Screws M 10x20 DIN 912
24 thick
24 thick
Pin
retainer
Type
Adjustable
fixed in position.
Thread UNF 2 1/2-12
also available on request
(Omit suffix -M from Part number)
Note: 150 mm stroke model
does not include Stop Collar
and positive stop is provided
by the rod button which is
60 mm dia.
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
41
9,5
!76
80
Breite
16 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
58
11
70
89
89
Breite 16 mm
70
10,6
!
16
38
32
32
!76
38
19
!19
33
L6 max
16
35
!19,1
9,5
17,5
L1max
L1min
9,5
L4
17,5
10,6
45
45
19
124
143
89
!
S 1600 (1 1/8)
QFL 1600
Side Foot Mounting
Foot Mounting Kit S 1600 (250-0303) = 2 Square flanges + 2 Side bars + 2 Locking rings + 4 Socket head screws.
Square Flange
M64x2 For use on new installations:
NM 64 QF 64
Locking Ring Square Flange
thick 16 mm
Clamping
slot
25 102 64 257
50 127 90 309
100 178 140 410
150 229 214 530
Dimensions
Stroke L
1
* L
4
L
6 max.
thick
16 mm
110
Breite
20 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
80
11
QF 90
Square Flange
Clamping
slot
thick
20 mm
C 1600 (1 1/8)
!60
19,1 A max.
siehe Stodmpfer
PP 64
Poly Button
noise suppression.
on Page 46.
see shock absorber dims.
Side Load Adaptor
Mounting, installation etc. see pages 43.
M64x2
Hub
23
(48,5)
100
30
(55)
M90x2
170
!56
max.
20
Stroke
BV 6425
BV 6450
Dims. in ()
for BV 6450
Standard Models
MA adjustable
Special Models
MCA, MAA, MLA
Special Models
MCS, MAS, MLS
MA 6450 M
Adjustable
Thread Size M64
Stroke 50 mm
Metric Thread
Hub
30 !
67 !
40
25 (50)
(69)
**Amax 184,5 (236)
Stroke
Dims. in ()
for PB 6450
PB 6425
PB 6450
Steel Shroud
Interchange Details A 1 1/2
Replacement with the MAGNUM Series MA 64 and MC 64
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
42
*Earlier Model MAGNUM Series
Code
Adjustable
*W
3
Stroke Adjustable *W
3
Stroke Self-Compensating *W
3
Stroke
mm mm mm
1 A 1 1/2x2 1800 50 MA 6450 M 2040 50 MC 6450 M 1700 50
2 A 1 1/2x3 1/2 3200 89 MA 64100 M 4080 100 MC 64100 M 3400 100
3 A 1 1/2x5 4500 127 MA 64100 M 4080 100 MC 64100 M 3400 100
4 A 1 1/2x6 1/2 5900 165 MA 64150 M 6120 150 MC 64150 M 5100 150
* W
3
= Max. energy capacity per cycle in Nm.
A 1 1/2 x -R (Rear Flange) MA 64 , MC 64
L1
20
Hub
60 Hub
L1 100
76
13
A 1 1/2 x -F (Front Flange) MA 64 , MC 64
L2
20
Hub
20
Hub L2 100
76
13
A 1 1/2 x -S (Side Foot Mounting) MA 64 , MC 64
L4
16
Hub
L3
L3
Hub L4 16
140
51
13
165
18
!
100
A 1 1/2 x -C (Clevis Mounting) MA 64 , MC 64
31,8
!19,1
19
!19,1
16
15,9 38
L5
min
max
31,8
!19,1
19
!19,1
16
15,9 38
L5
min
max
Nutmutter NM 64
Dimensions
*A1 1/2 *MA 64
Code L5 min L5 max L5 max
1 278.0 328.6 328.0
2 317.0 405.6 417.0
3 353.0 481.8 453.0
4 412.0 577.0 562.0
* Note! L5 max. is not the same.
Dimensions
Code L3 L4
2 170 59
3 208 59
4 246 78
Dimensions
Code L2
1 55
2 54
3 54
4 73
Dimensions
Code L1
1 196
2 233
3 271
4 329
Flange QFR 64-1 1/2
Flange QFF 64-1 1/2
Clevis Mount Set C 64-1 1/2
Foot Mount Set S 64-1 1/2
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
Locking Ring NM 64
.
For Magnum M33x1.5 to M64x2
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
43
Side Load Adaptor
For side load impact angles from 3 to 25.
With side load impact angles of more than 3 the opera-
ting lifetime of the shock absorber reduces rapidly due to
increased wear of the rod bearings. The optional BV side
load adaptor provides a long lasting solution. For moun-
ting the adaptor has the same outer thread as the next
larger size of standard shock absorber i. e.:
BV 3325 (M45x1,5) for MC, MA, ML 3325 M (M33x1,5)
BV 3350 (M45x1,5) for MC, MA, ML 3350 M (M33x1,5)
BV 4525 (M64x2) for MC, MA, ML 4525 M (M45x1,5)
BV 4550 (M64x2) for MC, MA, ML 4550 M (M45x1,5)
BV 6425 (M90x2) for ML 6425 M (M64x2)
BV 6450 (M90x2) for MC, MA, ML 6450 M (M64x2)
Material: Threaded body and plunger hardened high
tensile steel.
Mounting: Directly mount the shock absorber on the
outside thread of the side load adaptor or by using the
QF flange. You can not use a foot mounting.
BV
Steel Shroud
For thread sizes M33x1.5, M45x1.5 and M64x2 with 25 mm
or 50 mm stroke.
Grinding beads, sand, welding splatter, paints and adhe-
sives etc. can adhere to the piston rod. They then damage
the rod seals and the shock absorber quickly fails. In many
cases the installation of the optional Steel Shroud can
provide worthwhile protection and increase lifetime.
Material: Hardened high tensile steel.
Mounting: To mount the PB steel shroud it is necessary to
remove the rod end button of the shock absorber.
Note!
When installing dont forget to allow operating space
for the shroud to move as the shock absorber is cycled.
PB
Switch Stop Collar
For thread sizes M33x1.5 and M45x1.5
The new ACE StopLight Switch Stop Collar combination
serves as a safety element to provide stroke position infor-
mation for automatically sequenced machines. The com-
pact construction allows its use in nearly any application.
The standard rod button is detected by the proximity
switch at the end of its stroke to provide switch actuation.
The switch is normally open when the shock absorber is
extended and only closes when it has completed its oper-
ating stroke.
The AS Switch Stop Collar combination is only delivered
ready mounted onto the shock absorber c/w the switch.
Material: Hardened high tensile steel.
For circuit diagram of proximity switch see page 32.
AS
Shock Absorber Adaptor Body Plunger
Shock Absorber
Stroke
Steel Shroud
Shock Absorber
Switch
Stop Collar
Steel Button
with Elastomer Insert
Positive Stop
Positive Stop
Proximity Switch
Positive Stop
Industrial Shock Absorbers MAGNUM 33-HT to 64-HT
For High Ambient Temperatures and/or High Cycle Rates
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
44
D1
M
L2 B max
D2
A max
Anschlag
Positive Stop
Ordering Example MC 3350 M-2-HT
Self-Compensating
Thread Size M33
Stroke 50 mm
Metric Thread (omitted when using thread UNF)
Effective Weight Range Code
Version for High Temperature Use
Details Required when Ordering:
Load to be Decelerated m (kg)
Impact Velocity v (m/s)
Propelling Force F (N)
Operating Cycles per Hour x (/hr)
Number of Absorbers in Parallel n
Ambient Temperature C
Technical Data
Impact velocity range: 0.15 to 5 m/s, up to 20 m/s on request.
Oil filling: special temperature stable synthetic oil.
Material: Shock absorber body and accessories: Steel with black oxide
finish. Piston rod: high tensile steel hardened and chrome plated. Rod
end button: hardened steel with black oxide finish. Zinc plated return
spring. For optimum heat dissipation do not paint shock absorber.
Mounting: in any position.
Operating temperature range: -20C to 150C
Capacity rating: For Emergency Use only applications it is sometimes
possible to exceed above max. capacity ratings (please consult ACE for
details). The above W
4
ratings (max. energy Nm per hour) can some-
times be increased by using an external Air/Oil Tank (see page 51)
and Model version prefix MCA (please consult ACE for further details).
On request: Plated finishes for additional corrosion protection.
Dimensions and Capacity Chart
A max B D1 D2
*Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
L2 M
The Calculation and Selection of the most suitable shock absorber (effective weight range) for your application should
be carried out or checked by ACE Controls. Adjustable models are also available on request.
MC 3325 M 25 138 23 30 25 83 M33x1.5 155 215000 82000 4 0.45
MC 3350 M 50 189 48.5 30 25 108 M33x1.5 310 244000 93000 3 0.54
MC 4525 M 25 145 23 42 35 95 M45x1.5 340 307000 117000 4 1.13
MC 4550 M 50 195 48.5 42 35 120 M45x1.5 680 321000 122000 3 1.36
MC 6450 M 50 225 48.5 60 48 140 M64x2 1700 419000 159000 4 2.90
MC 64100 M 100 326 99.5 60 48 191 M64x2 3400 550000 200000 3 3.70
* nominal stroke length (without stop collar fitted)
Nm per cycle Nm per hour
at 20C at 100C
W
3
max. Nm W
4
max. Nm W
4
max. Nm
Max. Energy Capacity
Air/Oil Tanks
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
45
22
! 43
2,5
NPT 1/8
102
7
8,5
138
17
195
10,2
95
NPTF 1/2
(G 3/8)**
47,5
3
! 86
NPTF 3/8
20
334
16,5
165
NPTF 3/4
(G 3/4)**
92
5
! 152
Oil capacity 20 cm
3
Material: Alu. caps and
polycarbonate body.
Piston rod returns immediately to
extended position when load moves
away. Operation without main air
supply possible for short periods.
Spring return with Air/Oil Tank.
No air supply connected.
Note: Will extend return time.
Return stroke may be sequenced by
pneumatic valve at any desired time.
No return force until valve energised.
Oil recirculation circuit for extreme
high cycle rates. Warm oil is positively
circulated through air/oil tank for
increased heat dissipation.
Part Numbers CV
max. pressure 20 bar
max. temperature 95C
Suitable for: Oil, Air, Water.
Material: Aluminium
Return force can be adjusted by pres-
sure regulator. Ensure safe minimum
pressure to return shock absorber.
Connection of two shock absorbers
to one air/oil tank is possible. Use next
larger size tank. Combination with
examples 2, 3 and 5 possible.
Connection Examples Air/Oil Tanks
Non-return valve
RV
Pipe short as possible.
Max. pressure 8 bar
Oil capacity 330 cm
3
Material: Alu. caps and steel body
polycarbonate sight gauge.
Oil capacity 2600 cm
3
Material: Alu. caps and steel body
polycarbonate sight gauge.
Max. pressure 8 bar. Max. temperature 80C.
Oil filling: ATF-Oil 42 cSt at 40C for all shock
absorbers in Magnum Series.
Mount air/oil tank higher than shock
absorber. Bleed all air from system
before operating.
Attention: Exhaust tank before carrying out
service. Check valve holds pressure!
Suggested Air/Oil tanks in accordance with W
4
ratings
1
4
2
5
3
6
Model
Part No.
CV 1/8 19 24 1/8
CV 1/4 29 33 1/4
CV 3/8 29 33 3/8
CV 1/2 41 40 1/2
CV 3/4 48 59 3/4
Part Numbers
MCA, MAA, MLA33 AO 1 CV 1/8 AO 3 CV 1/4 4
CAA, AA 2 AO 691 CV 1/2 AO 82 CV 3/4 15
CAA, AA 3 AO 691 CV 1/2 AO 82 CV 3/4 19
CAA 4 AO 82 CV 3/4 AO 82 CV 3/4 38
AO 82 details on request.
with tank examples 1-4 with recirc. circuits Ex. 5-6 Conn. pipe.
Type Tank non-return valve Tank non-return valve min.
A B C
AO 1 AO 3 AO 691
Thread Sizes for connection to air/oil tank
MCA, MAA, MLA 33 G1/8 outside* G1/8 inside
MCA, MAA, MLA 45 G1/8 inside G1/8 inside
MCA, MAA, MLA 64 G1/4 inside G1/4 inside
* adapted
** on request (add suffix -PG/-P)
Thread Thread
Type bottom side**
Pipe as short
as possible
Pressure regulator
Special unit necessary
Tee-piece
A B
C C
NPT 1/8"
NPTF 3/4"
NPTF 3/8"
NPTF 1/2"
Mounting Hints and Operation Details
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
46
Mechanical Stop
The MAGNUMSeries units have a built in stop collar
(mechanical stop) which also serves as the front
adjuster.
If using a shock absorber without a stop collar it is
important to install a mechanical stop 0.5 to 1 mm
before the end of the stroke.
Mounting Options
Repairs
It is possible to overhaul ACE shock absorbers in M 33 sizes and larger. We would recommend that damaged or worn
shock absorbers are returned to ACE for repair. You will find that this is more economic than the comparative cost of
repairing yourself. Spare parts and seal kits etc. are available however if required.
Clamp button in vice and
loosen screw 3 or 4 turns.
Stop Collar +
Front Adjuster* Rear Aduster*
*MA and ML only
Press fit
(screw loctited for security).
Drive out piston rod
with punch as shown.
General
For optimum heat dissipation do not paint the shock absorber. For applications in environments with acids, dusts or
powders, abrasives, steam or water please protect the shock absorber and/or consider the special accessories on page
43. The shock absorber should be securely mounted onto a flat and smooth surface of adequate strength.
Self Compensating Models
The MC family of shock absorbers are self compensating. Providing the effective weight on the application remains wit-
hin the band given in the capacity charts then no adjustment is necessary for changes in weights, speeds or propelling
force. These units are available with five standard operating bands (me min. me max.) and are identified by the suffix
number after the model which goes from -0 (very soft) up to -4 (very hard).
The optimum deceleration is achieved when there is no abrupt change in the load velocity at the beginning or the end
of the shock absorber stroke.
If there is a hard impact at the start of stroke f use the next softer version (i. e. lower suffix number).
If there is a hard setdown at the end of stroke f use the next harder version, or mount two units in parallel.
Alternatively change to a larger bore size unit. Contact ACE for further advice.
Adjustable Models
The adjustment has a graduated scale from 0 to 9. The adjuster in the body of MA/ML 64 has a side mounted locking
screw which should be loosened (1/2 turn max.) with a hex. key before commencing adjustment. The MAGNUM Series
units can be adjusted by the hex. socket at the rear of the body or by rotating the front stop collar. Both adjusters are
internally connected and will show the same adjustment value on the scales as they are turned. After installation cycle
the equipment a few times and turn the adjustment until optimum deceleration is achieved (i. e. no abrupt change in the
load velocity observed at the beginning or at the end of shock absorber stroke). The shock absorber is delivered set at 5.
If there is a hard impact at start of stroke f adjust the unit softer i. e. towards 9 on the scale.
If there is a hard setdown at end of stroke f adjust the unit harder i. e. towards 0.
Adjustment approaching 0 means: a) Impact velocity is too low: consider changing to Model type ML or:
b) Shock absorber selected is too small: use next larger size or mount 2 units
in parallel.
Basic Model Flange Mounting Side Foot Mounting Clevis Mounting
Removing Rod End Button
Special Shock Absorbers
Adjustable and Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
47
ACE can also offer more than its already extensive range of standard products covering body sizes from M6 up to
M130. For over 40 years we have designed and developed many customer specific specials. These include units with
special damping characteristics for unusual applications or non-standard materials or operating fluids. Special seals
and mounting accessories for customers specific applications are also available.
Below are a few examples of the thousands of special options that we have provided in the past.
MC 150 M-V4A
MC 150 MH-V4A
MC 150 MH2-V4A
MC 225 M-V4A
MC 225 MH-V4A
MC 225 MH2-V4A
MC 600 M-V4A
MC 600 MH-V4A
MC 600 MH2-V4A
* For Technical details see page 21.
Model*
Part No.
with damping in the pull
direction. Available in
medium bore sizes from
M33x1.5 to M64x2.
Ask for details.
with non-standard spring
for higher return force.
For sizes from M14x1.5
upwards.
Ask for details.
with guided anti-rotation
head with built in roller
for damping and then
allowing the sideways
transfer of heavy loads.
Available on heavy duty
units from M100x2
upwards.
Ask for details.
with lengthened piston
rods and clevis mounts
for extended mounting
points. Available in all
sizes from M33x1.5
upwards.
Ask for details.
Shock absorbers with special anti-corrosion finishes.
Options include plated or painted finishes, Weartec finish
for saltwater protection and units with all exposed parts
manufactured from V4A Stainless Steel.
Middle bore sizes M33x1,5 and M45x1,5
by quotation.
Heavy Industrial Shock Absorbers CA 2 to CA 4
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
48
48
Mechanical Stop: Install Mechanical Stop 2.5 mm to 3 mm
before the end of stroke.
Energy capacity: For Emergency Use Only Applications
it may be possible to exceed published energy per cycle
(W
3
) figures. Please consult ACE for further details.
Material: Steel body with black oxide finish. Piston rod
high tensile steel hardened and chrome plated. Return
spring zinc plated. To avoid reducing heat dissipation
do not paint outer body.
Impact velocity range: 0.3 m/s
up to 5 m/s.
Oil filling: Automatic
Transmission Fluid viscosity
42 cSt. at 40C.
-12C to +90C.
On request: Special oils, or
for higher or lower impact
velocities outside range shown
above, or other options please
consult ACE.
Button
Return Spring
Piston Rod
Main Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
The CA 2 to CA 4 complete the ACE
product range of self-compensating
shock absorbers. With these units
ACE has a continuous range of self-
compensating units to handle
effective weights from 0.3 kg up to
326 000 kg. The robust CA Series
units are designed for really heavy
duty applications. Damage caused
by errors in adjustment setting is
ruled out by their self-compensating
design. You can select the correct
model for your application using the
ACE Selection Program or by using
the capacity charts.
In comparison with the earlier SAHS
range the new CA 2" has 70% and
the new CA 3" 25% higher capacity.
The new CA units are maintenance
free and available self-contained
or for use with an external
air/oil tank.
Heavy Industrial Shock Absorbers A 11/2 to A 3
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
49
49
Mechanical Stop: Install Mechanical Stop 2.5 mm to 3 mm
before the end of stroke.
Adjustment: Turning the adjustment screw towards 0
makes the unit harder and towards 9 makes it softer.
Energy capacity: For Emergency Use Only Applications
it may be possible to exceed published energy per cycle
(W
3
) figures. Please consult ACE for further details.
high tensile steel, hardened and chrome plated. Return
spring zinc plated. To avoid reducing heat dissipation do
not paint.
Impact velocity range: 0.1 up
to 5 m/s.
Oil filling: Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid viscosity 42cSt.
at 40C.
-12C to +90C.
On request: Special oils, or
for higher or lower impact
velocities outside range shown
above, or other options please
consult ACE.
Return Spring
Piston Rod
Main Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
Adjustment
The adjustable shock absorbers of
the ACE Product Series A11/2 to A 3
cover an effective weight range from
0.3 kg up to 204 000 kg. The robust
A Series units are designed for really
heavy duty applications. The units
are adjusted by means of a socket
head screw in the rear end. The ad-
justable A series can replace the older
SAHS series units with the same
mounting dimensions. (Ask ACE for
assistance.)
The A units are maintenance free and
self-contained.
Heavy Duty Industrial Shock Absorbers A 1 1/2
Adjustable, not for Use on New Installations
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
50
Capacity Chart
W
4
per Hour***
**per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
Return Force
N
min max
Spring
Return
Time
s
Max.
Side-Load
Angle
Weight
kg Type
A11/2 x 2 50 1800 362000 452000 195 - 32000 160 - 210 0.1 5 7.5
A11/2 x 31/2 89 3200 633000 791000 218 - 36000 110 - 210 0.25 4 8.9
A11/2 x 5 127 4500 904000 1130000 227 - 41000 90 - 230 0.4 3 10.3
A11/2 x 61/2 165 5900 1180000 1469000 308 - 45000 90 - 430 0.4 2 12
* Standard effective weight ranges only shown. Please consult ACE if your application falls outside these for alternative range unit.
** For Emergency Use Only applications it may be possible to exceed these max. capacity ratings. Please consult ACE for further details.
*** Figures for oil recirculation systems on request
with
Oil Tank
Self-
Contained
Mounting Options A 1 1/2 . . .
Mechanical Stop: Install Mechanical Stop 2.5 mm to 3 mm before the end of stroke.
Foot Mounting not available on 2 stroke models.
Rear Flange -R
L1
19
Hub
102
76
13
Front Flange -F
L2
19
Hub 102
76
13
Foot Mounting -S
L4
16
Hub
L3
140
51
13
165
18
!
102
Clevis Mounting -C
31,8
!19,1
19
!19,1
16
15,9 38
L5
min
max
Stroke Stroke
Stroke
Dimensions A 11/2
A11/2 x 2 195.2 54.2 - - 277.8 - 328.6
A11/2 x 31/2 233 54.2 170 58.6 316.6 - 405.6
A11/2 x 5 271.5 54.2 208 58.6 354.8 - 481.8
A11/2 x 61/2 329 73 246 78 412 - 577
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
Ordering Example A 11/2 x 2 R
Adjustable
Bore Size 11/2"
Stroke Length 2" = 50.8 mm
Rear Flange Mounting
Model Type Prefix:
A = self-contained with return spring
(This is standard model)
AA = air/oil return without return spring
Use only with external air/oil tank
NA = self-contained without return spring
SA = air/oil retun with return spring
CA 2 and A 2 Series Heavy Duty Models
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
51
! 35
E
19 19
Amax
Bmax
Hub
Capacity Chart
W
4
per Hour***
**per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
-1
min kg max
-2
min kg max
-3
min kg max
-4
min kg max
Return Force
N
min max
Spring
Return
Time
s
Max.
Side-Load
Angle
Weight
kg Type
CA 2 x 2 50 3600 1100000 1350000 700 - 2200 1800 - 5400 4500-13600 11300 - 34000 210 - 285 0.25 3 12.8
CA 2 x 4 102 7200 1350000 1700000 1400 - 4400 3600 -11000 9100-27200 22600- 68000 150 - 285 0.50 3 14.8
CA 2 x 6 152 10800 1600000 2000000 2200 - 6500 5400 -16300 13600-40800 34000-102000 150 - 400 0.60 3 16.9
CA 2 x 8 203 14500 1900000 2400000 2900 - 8700 7200 -21700 18100-54400 45300-136000 230 - 650 0.70 3 19.3
CA 2 x 10 254 18000 2200000 2700000 3600 -11000 9100 -27200 22600-68000 56600-170000 160 - 460 0.80 3 22.8
A 2 x 2 50 3600 1100000 1350000 250 - 77000 210 - 285 0.25 3 14.3
A 2 x 4 102 9000 1350000 1700000 230 - 72500 150 - 285 0.50 3 16.7
A 2 x 6 152 13500 1600000 2000000 260 - 86000 150 - 400 0.60 3 19.3
A 2 x 8 203 19200 1900000 2400000 260 - 90000 230 - 650 0.70 3 22.3
A 2 x 10 254 23700 2200000 2700000 320 - 113000 160 - 460 0.80 3 26.3
with
Air/Oil Tank
Self-
Contained
Soft Hard
Dimensions
A max B max C D max E Type
2 x 2 313 110 173 125 70
2 x 4 414 160 224 175 70
2 x 6 516 211 275 226 70
2 x 8 643 287 326 302 92
2 x 10 745 338 377 353 108
! 108 (120) 19 19
Amax
Bmax
M100x2
32 15
Dmax
C 15
60
60
36
160
190
18 !
Rear Flange -R Front Flange -F
Foot Mounting -SM
Mounting Options CA, A . . .
Dimensions of Clevis Mountings available on request.
NOTE! For replacement of existing SAHS 2" foot mounted units order the old type foot mounting -S.
111
140
17
!
Dims. in ( ) for Model A 2 only Adjuster Model A 2 only
Adjuster Model A 2 only
Stroke
Ordering Example CA 2 x 4-3 F
Self-Compensating
Bore Size 2"
Stroke Length 4" = 102 mm
Effective Weight Range Version
Front Flange Mounting
Model Type Prefix:
A, CA = self-contained with return spring
AA, CAA = air/oil return without return spring
NA, CNA = self-contained without return spring
SA, CSA = air/oil retun with return spring
112
25 25
Amax
Bmax
Hub
! 45
CA 3 and A 3 Series Heavy Duty Models
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
52
NOTE! For replacement of existing SAHS 3" foot mounted units please consult ACE.
SAHS 3" and AHS 3" Interchange dimensions to order
136,5
165
17 !
124
152
! 140 (155) 25 25
Amax
Bmax
M130x2
45 25
Dmax
C 25
80
80
44
216
254
17 !
Foot Mounting -SM
max.
Achsab-
weichung
Gewicht
kg
Capacity Chart
W
4
per Hour***
**per Cycle
W
3
Stroke
mm
-1
min kg max
-2
min kg max
-3
min kg max
-4
min kg max
Return Force
N
min max
Spring
Return
Time
s Type
CA 3 x 5 127 14125 2260000 2800000 2900 - 8700 7250-21700 18100 - 54350 45300 -135900 270 - 710 0.60 3 28.9
CA 3 x 8 203 22600 3600000 4520000 4650-13900 11600-34800 29000 - 87000 72500 -217000 280 - 740 0.80 3 33.4
CA 3 x 12 305 33900 5400000 6780000 6950-20900 17400-52200 43500 -130450 108700 -326000 270 - 730 1.20 3 40.6
A 3 x 5 127 15800 2260000 2800000 480-154000 270 - 710 0.60 3 32.7
A 3 x 8 203 28200 3600000 4520000 540-181500 280 - 740 0.80 3 38.5
A 3 x 12 305 44000 5400000 6780000 610- 204000 270 - 730 1.20 3 47.6
with
Air/Oil Tank
Self-
Contained
Soft Hard
Dimensions
A max B max C D max Type
3 x 5 502 210 260 216
3 x 8 641 286 337 292
3 x 12 890 433 438 439
Max.
Side-Load
Angle
Weight
kg
Mounting Options CA, A . . .
Dims. in ( ) for Model A 3 only
Stroke
Ordering Example A 3 x 8 R
Adjustable
Bore Size 3"
Model Type Prefix:
A, CA = self-contained with return spring
AA, CAA = air/oil return without return spring
NA, CNA = self-contained without return spring
SA, CSA = air/oil retun with return spring
Dimensions CA and CSA
4 x 6 716 278 678 240 444 256
4 x 8 818 329 780 291 495 307
4 x 16 1300 607 1261 569 698 585
Type A B C D E F
Dimensions CAA
4 x 6 666 228 628 190 444 206
4 x 8 767 278 729 240 495 256
4 x 16 1174 482 1136 444 698 460
Type A B C D E F
max.
Achsab-
weichung
Gewicht
kg
Capacity Chart
4 x 6 152 47500 3000000 5100000 6600000 3500 - 8600 8600 - 18600 18600 - 42700 480 - 1000 1,8 60
4 x 8 203 63300 3400000 5600000 7300000 5000 - 11400 11400 - 25000 25000 - 57000 310 - 1000 2,3 68
4 x 16 406 126500 5600000 9600000 12400000 10000 - 23000 23000 - 50000 50000 - 115000 310 - 1000 a. A. 170
Rod
W
4
per Hour Soft Medium Hard Return Force Reset Weight
Type Stroke **per Cycle Self- with Air/ with Oil -3 -5 -7 N Time kg
mm W
3 Contained Oil Tank Recirculation min kg max min kg max min kg max min max s FRP
Ordering Example CA 4 x 8-5 R
Self-Compensating
Bore Size 4"
Medium Effective Weight Version
A max
114
54 (63,5) !
B max 38
190 !
C max
D max 38
!16
C max
B max
NPT
1 1/2''
20
102 10
254
27
203
254
27
203
114
204
165
70
6 x 60
159
Gewinde
5/8''-18 UNF
!27
E
22
22 F max
Part Number CA, . . .
6 Tapped Holes (Primary Mounting) -FRP Side Foot Mounting -S
Thread
5/8"-18 UNF
Figures in ( ) for Type CA 4x16
NPT
Heavy Duty Industrial Shock Absorbers CA 4
Self-Compensating
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
53
Model Type Prefix:
CA = self-contained with return spring
(This is standard model)
CAA = air/oil return without return spring
Use only with air/oil tank for high energy
capacity per hour figures
CNA = self-contained without return spring
CSA = air/oil return with return spring
Use only with air/oil tank
Shock absorber stroke Shock absorber stroke
Pivot point of lever
With heavy loads or high velocities
normal cylinder cushions are often
overloaded. This causes shock loading
leading to premature cylinder failure
or excessive maintenance. Using
oversized cylinders to withstand this
shock loading is not the best solution
since this considerably increases air
consumption and costs.
The side loading is removed from
the shock absorber piston rod leading
to considerably longer life.
Wherever possible mount shock
absorber so that impacting face is
perpendicular to shock absorber
axis half way through stroke.
See pages 31 and 33 for more details.
1
2
3
4
5
6
ACE Shock absorbers for
pneumatic cylinders
For: optimum deceleration
higher speeds
smaller cylinders
reduced air consumption
smaller valves and pipework
Example: MA 3350 M-Z
-Z = cylinder mounting
The lever 1 swings with the pin 2 in
a slotted hole around pivot point 3.
The lever is smoothly decelerated at
the extreme end of its travel.
Undamped free travel with
damped end position
It is possible to use only one shock
absorber for both end positions by
using different pivot points as shown.
Tip: Leave approx. 1.5 mm of shock
absorber stroke free at each end of
travel.
With a little additional work a normal
unidirectional shock absorber can be
converted to work in 2 directions by
using a mechanism as shown.
Air bleed collar
Seal with Teflon
tape or sealant
Double acting shock absorber
Side load adapter for high
side load angles
Stroke s
Free travel
1
2
3
By using this Air Bleed adaptor the
operating lifetime of shock absorbers
in aggressive environments can be
considerably increased.
The adapter protects the shock
absorber seals from cutting fluids,
cleaning agents, cooking oils etc.
by using a low pressure air bleed.
For more details see page 32.
One shock absorber
for both ends of travel
Installation Examples
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
54
Stroke
8.1 The latch absorbs the kinetic
energy so that the object contacts
the fixed stop gently.
8.2 The latch absorbs the rotational
energy of the turntable etc. The turn-
table can then be held in the datum
position with a lock bolt or similar.
Increasing stroke length mechanically
The fire door travels quickly until it
reaches the lever. It is then gently
decelerated by the lever mounted
shock absorber and closes without
shock or danger to personnel.
The use of ACE shock absorbers
allows higher operating speeds and
weights as well as protecting the
drive mechanism and housing from
shock loads.
The gentle deceleration of ACE
shock absorbers makes the use of
adjustable stop clamps possible and
removes any chance of the clamp
slipping. The kinetic energy is com-
pletely removed before the mechani-
cal stop is reached thus making high
index speeds possible.
Rotary actuator
or rack and pinion
drive
Adjustable stop clamp
e. g. for handling equipment
By means of a lever the effective
stroke length can be increased and
mounting space to the left reduced.
Ride-over latch
e. g. firedoor
Ride over latch 8
9
10
11
12
50% lower reaction force (Q)
50% lower deceleration (a)
By driving 2 shock absorbers
against one another nose-to-nose,
the effective stroke length can be
doubled.
Double stroke length 7
8.1 8.2
Safety travel
(prevents
trapping)
Installation Examples
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
55
Safety Shock Absorbers SCS-33 to 64
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
56
56
Based on the innovative design con-
cepts of the MAGNUM range, ACE in-
troduces the SCS-33 to SCS-64 series
of safety shock absorbers.
Designed to provide machine protection
in an emergency runaway situation the
SCS-33 to SCS-64 series provide a cost
effective method of protecting vital
machinery in emergency stop situations.
Specially optimised orificing design
provides extremely high capacity in a
compact envelope size making them
ideal for safety critical applications
on portal gantry systems, automatic
transfer machines and robot systems
where an emergency runaway could
otherwise result in expensive damage
or danger. With up to 300% higher
capacity than other shock absorber
designs the new SCS-33 to 64 range
provides true linear deceleration
protecting vital equipment at an
affordable cost. Optional rod
sensor available for indicating
the complete retraction of
the piston rod.
Main Bearing
Piston
Piston Ring
One Piece Pressure Chamber
with Optimised Metering Orifices
to Suit Specific Application
Impact velocity range: on request.
Material: Steel body with black oxide finish. Piston rod:
high tensile steel chrome plated. Rod button: hardened
steel with black oxide finish.
Return spring: zinc plated.
Mounting: in any position.
Temperature range:
-12C to 70C. Higher tempera-
tures on request.
Heavy Duty
One-Piece
Steel
Outer Body
Unique
Identification
Code
Number
Safety Shock Absorber SCS-33
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
57
M33x1,5
Anschlag
Hub !30
!25
B
A max
6,5
!39,6
44
Breite
10 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
32
6,6
NM 33 QF 33
Tightening torque: 11 Nm
Part Number SCS-33 . . .
A max B C min C max
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
SCS-33-25 23 138 83 25 60 68 310 500 3 0.45
SCS-33-50 48.5 189 108 32 86 93 620 950 2 0.54
NOTE: Hydroshock super high capacity version available at additional cost.
Max. Energy Capacity per Cycle
Standard Optimised Version
W
3
max Nm W
3
max Nm
Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
D
Ordering Example SCS-33-50-S-UKxxxx
Safety Shock Absorber
Thread Size M33
Max. Stroke without Positive Stop 50 mm
Mounting Style: Foot
Identification No. (assigned by ACE)
Complete Details Required when Ordering:
Moving Load m (kg)
Emergency Impact Speed v (m/s) max.
Normal Speed vs (m/s) min.
Motor Power P (kW)
Stall Torque Factor HM (normal 2.5)
or technical data according to formulae and calculations
on page 13 to 15.
Technical Data
Energy capacity W
3
: At max. side load angle do not
exceed 80% of rated max. energy capacity below.
Return spring force: 45 to 135 N.
Operating temperature range: -12C to 70C.
Impact cycles per hour: Emergency use only.
In creep speed the shock absorber can be pushed through
its stroke.
In creep speed conditions the shock absorber provides
minimal resistance and there is no braking effect.
Calculation: For further details of calculation and selection
please consult ACE.
The calculation and selection of the correct ACE Safety
Shock Absorber for your application should be referred to
ACE for approval and assignment of unique identification
number.
Basic Unit
Stroke
Positive Stop
Clamping
Slot
Thick
10 mm
C D 10
20
max
min
M6
42
56
20
40
8
8
S 33
S 33 = 2 Flanges + 4 Screws M6x40, DIN 912 Tightening torque 11 Nm (Screws)
33
41
33 !
38
!
AH 33
Stop Collar
for propelling forces
higher than 55 kN
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
58
M45x1,5
Anschlag
Hub !42
!35
B
A max
9,5
!55,6
56
Breite
12 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
42
9
NM 45 QF 45
Square Flange Locking Ring
A max B C min C max
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
SCS-45-25 23 145 95 32 66 66 680 1200 3 1.13
SCS-45-50 48.5 195 120 40 92 91 1360 2350 2 1.36
SCS-45-75 74 246 145 50 118 116 2040 3500 1 1.59
W
3
max. Nm W
3
max. Nm
Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
D
Thread Size M45
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
Technical Data
Energy capacity W
3
its stroke.
please consult ACE.
number.
Basic Unit
Stroke
Positive Stop
Clamping
Slot
Thick
12 mm
C D 12,5
25
max
min
M8
60
80
28
56
10
16
S 45
27,5
39,5
42 !
57
!
AH 45
Stop Collar
higher than 90 kN
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
59
M64x2
Anschlag
Hub !60
!48
B
A max
Bei einem Hub von 150 mm entfllt die Anschlaghlse.
Festanschlag durch Aufprallkopf (60 mm) realisiert.
9,5
!76
80
Breite
16 mm
Klemm-
schlitz
58
11
NM 64 QF 64
Thread Size M64
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
Technical Data
Energy capacity W
3
its stroke.
please consult ACE.
number.
A max B C min C max
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
SCS-64-50 48.5 225 140 50 112 100 3400 6000 3 2.90
SCS-64-100 99.5 326 191 64 162 152 6800 12000 2 3.70
SCS-64-150 150 450 241 80 212 226 10200 18000 1 5.10
W
3
max. Nm W
3
max. Nm
Max. Side
Load Angle
Weight
kg
D
Basic Unit
Stroke
Positive Stop
Note: 150 mm stroke model does not include Stop Collar and
positive stop is provided by the rod button which is 60 mm dia.
Clamping
Slot
Thick
16 mm
C D 12,5
25
max
min
M10
78
100
40
80
12
12
S 64
50
61 !
76
!
AH 64
Stop Collar
higher than 140 kN
Stacker Crane Shock Absorbers SCS-38 to 63
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
60
60
In the normal ready condition the piston rod is fully
extended. When the impacting load strikes the absorber
the hydraulic oil behind the piston is forced out through
a series of metering orifices. The number of metering
orifices in action reduces proportionally though the stroke
and the load velocity is thereby smoothly reduced to zero.
The internal pressure and thus
the reaction force (Q) remains
constant throughout the entire
stroke length. The displaced oil
is stored in the bladder accumu-
lator. The integrated gas cham-
ber, containing low pressure
nitrogen, provides the return
force to reset the rod to its ex-
tended position and functions
as an accumulator for the
hydraulic oil displaced during
operation.
Rod Button
Piston Rod
Positive Stop
Main Bearing
Gas Chamber
Bladder Accumulator
Metering Orifices
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
ACE Stacker Crane Shock Absorbers
are self-contained and maintenance
free and are designed for emergency
deceleration of equipment such as
automated storage and retrieval sys-
tems. During normal operation they
provide only minimal resistance but
under a higher speed emergency im-
pact they provide smooth controlled
deceleration thus preventing equip-
ment damage.
The SCS Series units are available
with operating strokes up to 1200 mm
and are specially orificed to provide a
smooth constant deceleration through-
out their complete stroke length. The
internal hydraulic pressure and thus
the braking force, is maintained at a
constant safe level to bring the fast
moving load gently to rest in an emer-
gency. Optional rod sensor available
for indicating the complete extension
of the piston rod.
Stacker Crane Shock Absorber SCS-38
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
61
60
60
36
160
190
18 !
32
Amax
15
32
Hub
Emax D
15
! 35
19
B Hub
Amax
15
19 ! 108
M100x2
19
B Hub
Amax
15
19
! 51
120
160
18 !
Ordering Example SCS-38-400-F-X
Stacker Crane Shock Absorber
Bore Size 38 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Mounting Style: Front Flange
Moving Load m (kg)
Full Load Speed v (m/s) min./max.
Creep Speed vs (m/s) max.
Motor Power P (kW)
Stall Torque Factor ST (normal 2.5)
Number of Absorbers in parallel n
on page 13 to 15.
Technical Data
Rear Flange -R
Side Foot Mounting -S
Front Flange -F
Impact velocity range v: 0.9 to 4.6 m/s.
Reaction force Q: at max. capacity rating = 80 kN max.
Energy capacity W
3
Return force: 0.6 to 0.7 kN.
Filling pressure: approx. 2 bar.
Operating temperature range: -12C to 66C
(For lower temperatures please consult ACE).
In Creep Speed: The shock absorber can be pushed
through its stroke.
please consult ACE.
The calculation and selection of the correct ACE Stacker
Crane Shock Absorber for your application should be
referred to ACE for approval and assignment of unique
identification number.
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
A B D E
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
SCS-38-50 50 270 205 175 80 3.6 5 4 12 13
SCS-38-100 100 370 255 225 132 7.2 5 4 14 15
SCS-38-150 150 470 305 275 180 10.8 5 4 16 17
SCS-38-200 200 570 355 325 230 14.4 5 4 18 19
SCS-38-250 250 670 405 375 280 18 4.7 3.7 20 21
SCS-38-300 300 785 470 440 330 21.6 3.9 2.9 22 23
SCS-38-350 350 885 520 490 380 25.2 3.4 2.4 24 25
SCS-38-400 400 1000 585 555 430 28.8 3 2 26 27
SCS-38-500 500 1215 700 670 530 36 2.4 1.4 30 31
SCS-38-600 600 1430 815 785 630 43.2 1.9 0.9 34 35
SCS-38-700 700 1645 930 900 730 50.4 1.6 0.6 38 39
SCS-38-800 800 1860 1045 1015 830 57.6 1.3 0.3 43 44
For other stroke lengths, special options (such as higher or lower impact velocity etc.), please consult ACE.
W
3
max. kNm
Max. Side Load Angle
Mounting Style
F & S R
Weight kg
Mounting Style
F & R S
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
62
Technical Data
72
72
40
190
225
22 !
35
Amax
20
35
Hub
Emax D
17,5
! 45
19
B Hub
Amax
20
19 ! 130
M120x2
19
B Hub
Amax
20
19
!70
140
180
18 !
Bore Size 50 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
Reaction force Q: At max. capacity rating = 160 kN max.
Energy capacity W
3
: At max side load angle do not exceed
80% of rated max.energy capacity below.
Filling pressure: Approx. 2 bar.
In creep speed: The shock absorber can be pushed
through its stroke.
please consult ACE.
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
SCS-50-100 100 390 270 235 138 14 5 4 22 23
SCS-50-150 150 490 320 285 188 21 5 4 25 26
SCS-50-200 200 590 370 335 238 28 5 4 27 28
SCS-50-250 250 690 420 385 288 35 4.5 3.5 30 31
SCS-50-300 300 805 485 450 338 42 3.8 2.8 33 34
SCS-50-350 350 905 535 500 388 49 3.3 2.3 35 37
SCS-50-400 400 1020 600 565 438 56 2.9 1.9 38 40
SCS-50-500 500 1235 715 680 538 70 2.3 1.3 44 45
SCS-50-600 600 1450 830 795 638 84 1.9 0.9 50 51
SCS-50-700 700 1665 945 910 738 98 1.6 0.6 55 57
SCS-50-800 800 1880 1060 1025 838 112 1.3 0.3 61 63
SCS-50-1000 1000 2310 1290 1255 1038 140 1 - 72 74
A B D E
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
W
3
max. kNm
Mounting Style
F & S R
Weight kg
Mounting Style
F & R S
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
63
80
80
44
210
254
27 !
45
Amax
20
45
Hub
Emax D
22,5
! 54
25
B Hub
Amax
20
25 ! 140
M130x2
25
B Hub
Amax
20
25
! 83
160
200
18 !
Technical Data
Bore Size 63 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
Reaction force Q: At max capacity rating = 210 kN max.
Energy capacity W
3
: at max. side load angle do not exceed
80% of rated max. energy capacity below.
Filling pressure: Approx. 2 bar.
Operating temperature range: -12C to +66C.
In creep speed: The shock absorber can be pushed through
its stroke.
please consult ACE.
Stroke
Stroke
Stroke
SCS-63-100 100 405 285 240 143 18 5 4 29 32
SCS-63-150 150 505 335 290 193 27 5 4 32 35
SCS-63-200 200 605 385 340 243 36 5 4 35 38
SCS-63-250 250 705 435 390 293 45 5 4 38 42
SCS-63-300 300 805 485 440 343 54 5 4 41 45
SCS-63-350 350 925 555 510 393 63 5 4 45 49
SCS-63-400 400 1025 605 560 443 72 5 4 48 52
SCS-63-500 500 1245 725 680 543 90 4.2 3.2 55 60
SCS-63-600 600 1445 825 780 643 108 3.4 2.4 62 66
SCS-63-700 700 1665 945 900 746 126 2.9 1.9 69 73
SCS-63-800 800 1865 1045 1000 843 144 2.5 1.5 75 79
SCS-63-1000 1000 2285 1265 1220 1043 180 1.9 0.9 89 93
SCS-63-1200 1200 2705 1485 1440 1243 216 1.4 0.4 102 106
A B D E
Stroke
mm
Model
Part Number
W
3
max. kNm
Mounting Style
F & S R
Weight kg
Mounting Style
F & R S
Industrial Crane Buffers CB-63 to 160
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
64
64
ACE Industrial Crane Buffers are self-
contained, maintenance free and are
designed for the emergency decelera-
tion of heavy industrial cranes. The
primary oil seals are protected inside
the main body and only a wiper seal is
necessary on the piston rod. Dirt or
contamination on the piston rod does
not cause oil leakage or failure as is
often the case with conventional buf-
fers. The integrated gas chamber
enables the CB Series crane buffers to
provide return forces of up to 63 kN.
This high return force is necessary for
multiple bridge cranes where the
buffers must separate the bridges after
an emergency collision. Normal buf-
fers would remain compressed after
such a collision and would not be
capable of accepting further impacts.
The robust, large dimensioned piston
rod bearing system, is designed for
very heavy duty use and is equivalent
to that used in other buffers 80%
larger in size. The CB series units are
custom orificed to suit your specific
application and provide a smooth con-
stant deceleration throughout their
complete stroke length.
In the normal ready condition the piston rod is fully
extended. When the impacting load strikes the buffer the
hydraulic oil behind the piston is forced through a series
of metering orifices. The number of metering orifices in
action reduces proportionally through the stroke and the
load velocity is thereby smooth-
ly reduced to zero. The internal
pressure and thus the reac-
tion force (Q) remains constant
throughout the entire stroke
length. The displaced oil is
stored in the piston accumu-
lator. The integrated gas cham-
ber, containing low pressure
nitrogen, provides the return
force to reset the rod to its
extended position and functions
as an accumulator for the
hydraulic oil displaced during
operation.
Rod Button
Piston Tube
Gas Chamber
Positive Stop
Rod Wiper
Mounting Flange
Separator Piston
Seals
Hydraulic Oil
Metering Orifices
Pressure Chamber
Piston
Industrial Crane Buffer CB-63
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
65
Technical Data
Front Flange -F Rear Flange -R
A B C
CB-63-100 100 420 288 192 1.5 16 16 900 - 128 000 3.5 12.7
CB-63-200 200 700 468 292 1.5 21 32 1800 - 256 000 3 16.7
CB-63-300 300 980 648 392 1.5 24 48 2700 - 384 000 2.5 20.8
CB-63-400 400 1260 828 492 1.5 25 64 3700 - 512 000 2 24.8
CB-63-500 500 1540 1008 592 1.5 26 80 4700 - 640 000 1.5 28.8
* The correct effective weight range for your application will be calculated by ACE and should fall within this band.
Special options: Special oils, Special flanges, additional corrosion protection etc. available on request.
Piston Rod
Return Force
min. (kN) max.
per Cycle
W
3
(kNm)
Effective Weight
me (kg)
*
Max. Side
Load Angle
()
Weight
(kg)
! 60
Amax
32
! 95 M90x2 ! 80
! 95 ! 95
Hub
C
19
41 19
Amax
Hub B
! 165
! 135
18 !
Part Number CB-63 . . .
Stroke
mm
Model
Ordering Example CB-63-400-F-X
Crane Buffer
Bore Size 63 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
Number of Buffers in Parallel n
on page 13 to 15.
Reaction force Q: At max. capacity rating = 187 kN. max.
hard chrome plated.
In creep speed: It is possible to use up to approx. 60%
of the buffer stroke.
The initial fill pressure governs the rod return force.
The calculation and selection of the correct ACE Crane
Buffer for your application should be referred to ACE for
approval and assignment of unique identification number.
Stroke
Stroke
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
66
Technical Data
CB-100-200 200 735 495 320 3.9 40 80 6 900 - 640 000 4 42.5
CB-100-300 300 1005 665 420 3.9 50 120 10 300 - 960 000 3.5 50.8
CB-100-400 400 1275 835 520 3.9 57 160 13 800 - 1 280 000 3 59.1
CB-100-500 500 1545 1005 620 3.9 63 200 17 200 - 1 600 000 2.5 67.5
CB-100-600 600 1815 1175 720 3.9 68 240 20 700 - 1 920 000 2 75.8
! 98
Amax
40
! 140 M130x2 ! 120
! 140 ! 140
Hub
C
25
56 25
Amax
Hub B
! 255
! 210
! 23
Crane Buffer
Bore Size 100 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
A B C
Piston Rod
Return Force
min. (kN) max.
per Cycle
W
3
(kNm)
Effective Weight
me (kg)
*
Max. Side
Load Angle
()
Weight
(kg)
Stroke
mm
Type
Reaction force Q: At max. capacity rating = 467 kN.
hard chrome plated.
Stroke
Stroke
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
67
Moving Load m (kg)
Motor Power P (kW)
on page 13 to 15.
Technical Data
! 152
Amax
60
! 230 M210x2 ! 178
! 230 ! 230
Hub
C
38
103 38
Amax
Hub B
! 350
! 295
! 27
6 x 60
Crane Buffer
Bore Size 160 mm
Stroke 400 mm
A B C
Piston Rod
Return Force
min. (kN) max.
per Cycle
W
3
(kNm)
Effective Weight
me (kg)
*
Max. Side
Load Angle
()
Weight
(kg)
Stroke
mm
Type
CB-160-400 400 1400 940 600 9.6 63 240 22 700 - 1 920 000 4 155
CB-160-600 600 2000 1340 800 9.6 63 360 34 000 - 2 880 000 3 188
CB-160-800 800 2600 1740 1000 9.6 63 480 45 400 - 3 840 000 2 221
Reaction force Q: At max. capacity rating = 700 kN.
Operating temperature range: -12C to +66C .
hard chrome plated.
Stroke
Stroke
Manual
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
68
ACE security shock absorbers are high-quality products.
To achieve long-lasting and trouble free operating life
please read the following instructions before installation.
Inner Pressure Tube Characteristics
The inner pressure tube is individually designed and
manufactured for each specific application.
When several safety shock absorbers of the same size but
with different metering orifice patterns are used in one
system it is important that the mounting positions are not
mixed up. Safety shock absorbers have individually
designed orifice patterns depending upon application and
therefore must only be installed in correct position.
The calculation and selection of the correct safety shock
absorbers should be performed or checked by ACE.
Mounting
To mount the shock absorber, we recommend the use of
original ACE mounting accessories shown in catalogue.
The mounting of each shock absorber must be exactly po-
sitioned so that the reaction force (Q) can be adequately
transmitted into the mounting structure.
ACE recommends installation via the front flange F
mounting style that ensures the maximum protection
against buckling.
The damper must be mounted so that the moving loads
are decelerated with the least possible side loading to the
piston rod. The maximum permissable side load angles
are detailed in our current catalogue.
The entire stroke length must be used for deceleration
because only using part of the stroke can lead to over-
stressing and damage to the unit.
Environmental Requirements
The permissible temperature range for each shock
absorber type can be found in our current catalogue.
CAUTION: Useage outside the specified temperature
range can lead to premature breakdown and damage of
of the shock absorbers which can then result in severe
system damage or machine failures.
Trouble free operation outdoors or in damp environments
is only warranted if the dampers are coated with a specific
corrosion protection finish.
Initial Start-Up Checks
First impacts on the shock absorber should only be tried
after correctly mounting and with reduced impact speeds
and if possible with reduced load. Differences between
calculated and actual operating data can then be detected
early on, and damage to your system can be avoided. If
the shock absorbers were selected on calculated data that
does not correspond to the maximum possible loading
(i.e. selection based on drive power being switched off or
at reduced impact speed) then these restricted impact
conditions must not be exceeded during initial testing or
subsequent use of the system. Otherwise you risk dama-
ging the shock absorbers and/or your machine by over-
stressing materials. After the initial trial check that the
piston rod fully extends again and that there are no signs
of oil leakage. Also check that the mounting hardware is
still securely tightened up.
You need to satisfy yourself that no damage has occurred
to the piston rod or the body or the mounting hardware.
Fixed Mechanical Stop
Safety shock absorbers do not need an external mechanical
stop. The stroke of the safety shock absorber is limited
by the contact of the rod end button onto the front body of
the shock absorber (with type SCS 33 to SCS 64 by the
load contacting the integral or additional stop collar).
What Needs to be Checked after a Full Load Impact?
Safety shock absorbers that were originally checked only
at reduced speed or load need to be checked again after a
full load impact (i.e. Emergency use) has occurred.
Check that the piston rod fully extends to it's full out posi-
tion, that there are no signs of oil leakage and that the
mounting hardware is still securely fixed.
You need to satisfy yourself that no damage has occurred
to the piston rod or the body or the mounting hardware.
If no damage has occurred, the safety shock absorber can
be put back into normal operation (see initial start-up).
Maintenance
Safety shock absorbers are sealed systems and do not
need special maintenance. Safety shock absorbers that are
not used regularly (i.e. that are intended for Emergency
stop systems) should be checked within the normal time
frame for safety checks, but at least once a year. At this
time special attention must be paid to checking that the
piston rod resets to its fully extended position, that there
is no oil leakage and that the mounting brackets are still
secure and undamaged. The piston rod must not show
any signs of damage. Safety shock absorbers that are in
use regularly should be checked every three months.
Repair Notice
If any damage to the shock absorber is detected or if there
are any doubts as to the proper functioning of the unit
please send the unit for service to ACE. Alternatively con-
tact your local ACE office for further advice.
Manual and Maintenance Instructions for Safety Shock Absorbers Type SCS and CB
Mounting style front flange F
Safety Shock Absorber CB Safety Shock Absorber SCS
Secured manufacturing
Controlled emergency stop
ACE Safety Shock Absorbers protect precision assem-
bly jigs for the aircraft industry.
The basic mount of this coordinate measuring machine
for the production of parts in the aircraft industry is
made of granite and must not be damaged. To avoid
damage from operating errors or mishandling, all
movement axes were equipped with safety shock
absorbers of the type SCS-45-50.
If the turntables malfunction the safety shock absorbers
decelerate the loads before expensive damage can
occur to the granite measuring tables.
ACE Safety Shock Absorbers speed up the manufac-
turing of caravans.
In this production of caravan side panels made of com-
pound materials, two complete production pieces are
transported towards two portals with spindle-heads.
The installed safety shock absorbers type SCS-45-75
prevent the 5500 kg load with speeds of up to 60m/min
nosediving into the valuable machine in case of a crash.
In comparison to its predecessor, the safety features
of the SCS-45-75 protect the machine structure more
effectively and allow for faster processing times.
Optimally protected turntable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
69
Safety shock absorbers attached to the moveable part of
the production line
The Profile Damper Type TA from
the innovative ACE TUBUS series is
a maintenance free, self-contained
damping element made from a special
Co-Polyester Elastomer.
As a result of the degressive damping
characteristic it provides a high ener-
gy absorption at the beginning of its
stroke.
The excellent temperature characteris-
tic of the material provides consistent
damping performance over a temper-
ature range of -40C to 90C.
The low installed weight, the econom-
ic price and the long operating life of
up 1 million cycles make this an at-
tractive alternative to hydraulic end
position damping, if the moving mass
does not have to stop in an exact da-
tum position and it is not necessary to
absorb 100% of the incoming energy.
The space-saving package size ranges
from 12 mm up to 116 mm and is
very simply and quickly installed with
the supplied specially stepped mount-
ing screw.
The TA series have been specially de-
veloped to provide Maximum Energy
Capacity in the Minimum Mounting
Space in the capacity range from
2Nm up to 2 000 Nm.
Life expectancy is extremely high; up
to twenty times longer than for ure-
thane dampers, up to ten times longer
than rubber bumpers and up to five
times longer than steel springs.
Mounting Screw
Overload capacity: For emergency use only (1 cycle) it is
possible to exceed the W
3
rating by +40%.
Environment: Resistant to oil, grease, seawater and to
microbe or chemical attack. Excellent UV and ozone resist-
ance. Material does not absorb water or swell.
Dynamic force range: 980 N to 82 000 N
Temperature range: - 40C to 90C
Energy absorption: 40% to 66%
Material hardness rating: Shore 55D
Mounting: in any position
Impact velocity range:
up to max. 5 m/s
Mounting screw torque:
M3: 2Nm
M4: 4Nm
M5: 6Nm
M6: 10 Nm
M8: 25 Nm
M12: 85 Nm
M16: 210 Nm
On request: Special strokes,
-characteristics, -spring rates,
-sizes and materials.
Calculation and selection
to be approved by ACE.
One-Piece
Profile Body
TUBUS-Series Type TA
Profile Damper Axial Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
70
70
*W
3
max Stroke Weight
Type Nm/cycle mm D L1 M L2 d1 d2 in gm
TA 12-5 2 5 12 3 M3 11 15 11 3
TA 17-7 6 7 17 4 M4 16 22 15 4
TA 21-9 10 9 21 5 M5 18 26 18 5
TA 22-10 15 10 22 6 M6 19 27 19 5
TA 28-12 30 12 28 6 M6 26 36 25 10
TA 34-14 50 14 34 6 M6 30 43 30 20
TA 37-16 65 16 37 6 M6 33 48 33 25
TA 40-16 80 16 40 8 M8 35 50 34 30
TA 43-18 100 18 43 8 M8 38 55 38 40
TA 47-20 130 20 47 12 M12 41 60 41 50
TA 50-22 160 22 50 12 M12 45 64 44 60
TA 54-22 190 22 54 12 M12 47 68 47 65
TA 57-24 230 24 57 12 M12 51 73 50 90
TA 62-25 280 25 62 12 M12 54 78 53 105
TA 65-27 350 27 65 12 M12 58 82 57 130
TA 70-29 400 29 70 12 M12 61 86 60 145
TA 72-31 500 31 72 16 M16 65 91 63 175
TA 80-32 600 32 80 16 M16 69 100 69 225
TA 82-35 700 35 82 16 M16 74 105 72 260
TA 85-36 800 36 85 16 M16 76 110 75 300
TA 90-38 900 38 90 16 M16 80 114 78 335
TA 98-40 1200 40 98 16 M16 86 123 85 425
TA 116-48 2000 48 116 16 M16 101 146 98 740
*Max. Energy capacity per cycle for continuous use. For emergency use only (1 cycle) it is possible to exceed this rating by +40%.
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Energy - Stroke Characteristic (dynamic)
(with impact velocity over 0.5 m/s)
E
n
e
r
g
y

(
N
m
)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Stroke (mm)
With the aid of the characteristic curves above you can estimate the proportion of the total energy that will be absorbed.
Example: With impact energy of 50 Nm the Energy-Stroke diagram shows that a stroke of about 8.8 mm is needed. On
the Force-Stroke diagram you can estimate the proportion of absorbed energy to rebound energy at this stroke length.
Dynamic (v > 0.5 m/s) and static (v
<
0.5 m/s) characteristics of all types are available on request.

rebound
stroke
energy
F back
d
1
d
2
D
L
1
L
2
max.
Hub
M
The calculation and selection of the required profile damper should be carried out or be approved by ACE.
Characteristics of Type TA 37-16
9000
7500
6000
4500
3000
1500
0
Force - Stroke Characteristic (dynamic)
F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
F in
absorbed
energy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Stroke (mm)
TUBUS-Series Type TA
Profile Damper Axial Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
71
max.
Stroke
Ordering Example TA 37-16
TUBUS axial
Outer- 37 mm
Stroke 16 mm
The Profile Damper Type TS from
Co-Polyester Elastomer. As a result of
the almost linear damping characteris-
tic it provides a very smooth energy
absorption with minimum reaction
loads on the machine. The excellent
temperature characteristic of the ma-
terial provides consistent damping
performance over a temperature range
of - 40C to 90C. The low installed
weight, the economic price and the
long operating life of up to 1 million
cycles makes this an attractive alterna-
tive to hydraulic end position damp-
ing, if the moving mass does not have
to stop in an exact datum position and
it is not necessary to absorb 100% of
the incoming energy.
The space-saving package size ranges
ing screw.
The TS series have been specially de-
veloped to provide Maximum Energy
Capacity in the Minimum Mounting
Space in the capacity range from 2Nm
up to 910 Nm.
than rubber buffers and up to five
3
rating by +40%.
Dynamic force range: 1300 N to 24 000 N
Temperature range: -40C to 90C
Material hardness rating: Shore 40D
up to max. 5 m/s
M4: 4Nm
M5: 6Nm
M6: 10 Nm
M12: 85 Nm
M16: 210 Nm
On request: special strokes,
Mounting Screw
One-Piece
Profile Body
TUBUS-Series Type TS
Profile Damper Axial Soft Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
72
72
TUBUS-Series Type TS
Profile Damper Axial Soft Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
73
*W
3
max Stroke Weight
Type Nm/cycle mm D L1 M L2 d1 d2 in gm
TS 14-7 2 7 14 4 M4 15 19 13 3
TS 18-9 4 9 18 5 M5 18 24 16 4
TS 20-10 6 10 20 6 M6 21 27 19 5
TS 26-15 15 15 26 6 M6 28 37 25 10
TS 32-16 25 16 32 6 M6 32 44 30 15
TS 35-19 30 19 35 6 M6 36 48 33 25
TS 40-19 35 19 40 6 M6 38 51 34 30
TS 41-21 45 21 41 12 M12 41 55 38 40
TS 44-23 65 23 44 12 M12 45 60 40 45
TS 48-25 80 25 48 12 M12 49 64 44 60
TS 51-27 90 27 51 12 M12 52 69 47 70
TS 54-29 115 29 54 12 M12 55 73 50 80
TS 58-30 135 30 58 12 M12 59 78 53 100
TS 61-32 160 32 61 16 M16 62 83 56 120
TS 64-34 195 34 64 16 M16 66 87 60 145
TS 68-36 230 36 68 16 M16 69 92 63 165
TS 75-39 285 39 75 16 M16 75 101 69 210
TS 78-40 340 40 78 16 M16 79 105 72 245
TS 82-44 395 44 82 16 M16 84 110 75 275
TS 84-43 460 43 84 16 M16 85 115 78 300
TS 90-47 565 47 90 16 M16 92 124 84 395
TS 107-56 910 56 107 16 M16 110 147 100 615
d
1
d
2
D
L
1
L
2
max.
Hub
M
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
E
n
e
r
g
y

(
N
m
)
3 6 9 12 15 18
Stroke (mm)
Example: With impact energy of 50 Nm the Energy-Stroke diagram shows that a stroke of about 14 mm is needed. On the
Force-stroke diagram you can estimate the proportion of absorbed energy to rebound energy at this stroke length.
<

rebound
stroke
energy
F back
Characteristics of Type TS 44-23
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
F in
absorbed
energy
3 6 9 12 15 18
Stroke (mm)
max.
Stroke
Ordering Example TS 44-23
TUBUS axial soft
Outer- 44 mm
Stroke 23 mm
The Profile Damper Type TR from
Co-Polyester Elastomer. The radial de-
formation of the TR series provides a
very long and soft deceleration with a
progressive energy absorption to-
wards the end of stroke. The excellent
temperature characteristic of the ma-
terial provides consistent damping
performance over a temperature range
of -40C to 90C. The low installed
weight, the economic price and the
long operating life of up to 1 million
cycles makes this an attractive alterna-
tive to hydraulic end position damp-
ing, if the moving mass does not have
to stop in an exact datum position and
it is not necessary to absorb 100% of
the incoming energy.
The space saving package size ranges
ing screw.
The TR Series have been specially de-
veloped to provide Maximum Stroke
in the Minimum Mounting Space in
the capacity range from 2 Nm up to
115 Nm.
than rubber buffers and up to five
3
rating by +40%.
Dynamic force range: 300 N to 6200 N
Material hardness rating:
Shore 40D
up to max. 5 m/s
M5: 6 Nm
M6: 10 Nm
M8: 25 Nm
-characteristics, - spring rates,
Mounting Screw
One-Piece
Profile Body
TUBUS-Series Type TR
Profile Damper Radial Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
74
74
*W
3
max. Stroke Weight
Type Nm/cycle mm A L1 M L2 B C in gm
TR 29-17 2 17 29 5 M5 25 13 38 10
TR 37-22 3 22 37 5 M5 32 19 50 15
TR 43-25 4 25 43 5 M5 37 20 58 20
TR 50-35 6 35 50 5 M5 44 34 68 25
TR 63-43 15 43 63 5 M5 55 43 87 55
TR 67-40 25 40 67 5 M5 59 46 88 80
TR 76-46 40 46 76 6 M6 67 46 102 105
TR 83-50 45 50 83 6 M6 73 51 109 150
TR 85-50 70 50 85 8 M8 73 69 111 195
TR 93-57 90 57 93 8 M8 83 83 124 295
TR 100-60 115 60 100 8 M8 88 82 133 335
C A
L
1
L
2
max.
Hub
M
Tiefe B
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
E
n
e
r
g
y

(
N
m
)
0 8 16 32 44
Stroke (mm)
Example: With impact energy of 50 Nm the Energy-Stroke diagram shows that a stroke of about 31 mm is needed. On
the Force-stroke diagram you can estimate the proportion of absorbed energy to rebound energy at this stroke length.
<

rebound
stroke
energy F back
Characteristics of Type TR 93-57
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
F in
absorbed
energy
0 8 16 32 44
Stroke (mm)
Ordering Example TR 93-57
TUBUS radial
Outer- 93 mm
Stroke 57 mm
TUBUS-Series Type TR
Profile Damper Radial Damping
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
75
max.
Stroke
Width B
The Radial Tube Damper Type TR-L
from the innovative ACE TUBUS
series is a maintenance free, self-con-
tained damping element made from
a special Co-Polyester Elastomer. The
radial deformation of the TR-L series
provides a very long and soft deceler-
ation with a progressive energy ab-
sorption towards the end of the stroke.
The excellent temperature characteris-
tic of the material provides consistent
damping performance over a temper-
ature range of -40C to 90C. The tube
damper has been specially developed
for applications that require very low
reaction forces. The actual force gen-
erated depends upon the length of the
tube damper chosen. The TUBUS TR-L
type is suitable for a wide range of
applications that require protection
from shock or impact anywhere along
a straight line. Typical applications
include mining equipment, dockyard
handling equipment and on baggage
handling and conveyor systems. The
special stepped mounting screws sup-
plied make installation very quick and
simple. The TR-L series have been de-
veloped to provide maximum stroke
in the minimum mounting space.
Life expectancy is extreley high: up to
twenty times longer than for urethane
dampers, up to ten times longer than
rubber buffers and up to five times
longer than steel springs.
There are 3 small new types with
mounting screw M5. They provide
high energy capacity up to 30 Nm
with a maximum height of 59 mm.
3
rating by +40%.
ance. Outer material does not absorb water or swell.
Temperature range:
-40C to 90C
Material: Shore 40D hardness.
Energy absorption:
14% to 26%
up to max. 5 m/s
M5: 6 Nm
M8: 25 Nm
M16: 210 Nm
-colours, -sizes and materials.
Mounting Screws
One-Piece
Profile Body
TUBUS-Series Type TR-L
Profile Damper Radial Damping (Long Version)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
76
76
N
E
W
*W
3
Reaction max. Stroke Weight
Type Nm/cycle force in N mm A B C D M L1 L2 in kg
TR 29-17L 12 1450 17 29 80 38 40 M5 5 25 0.06
TR 43-25L 16 1900 25 43 80 58 40 M5 5 37 0.06
TR 63-43L 30 1950 43 63 80 87 40 M5 5 55 0.10
TR 66-40L-1 100 6800 40 66 152 87 102 M8 8 59 0.25
TR 66-40L-2 200 13600 40 66 305 87 254 M8 8 59 0.55
TR 66-40L-3 300 20400 40 66 457 87 406 M8 8 59 0.80
TR 66-40L-4 400 27200 40 66 610 87 559 M8 8 59 1.10
TR 66-40L-5 500 34000 40 66 762 87 711 M8 8 59 1.30
TR 76-45L-1 135 7200 45 76 152 100 102 M8 8 68 0.35
TR 76-45L-2 270 14500 45 76 305 100 254 M8 8 68 0.70
TR 76-45L-3 400 21700 45 76 457 100 406 M8 8 68 1.10
TR 76-45L-4 535 29000 45 76 610 100 559 M8 8 68 1.40
TR 76-45L-5 670 36300 45 76 762 100 711 M8 8 68 1.70
TR 83-48L-1 155 8100 48 83 152 106 102 M8 8 73 0.45
TR 83-48L-2 315 16300 48 83 305 106 254 M8 8 73 0.90
TR 83-48L-3 470 24500 48 83 457 106 406 M8 8 73 1.35
TR 83-48L-4 625 32600 48 83 610 106 559 M8 8 73 4.80
TR 83-48L-5 780 40800 48 83 762 106 711 M8 8 73 2.25
TR 99-60L-1 205 13600 60 99 152 130 102 M16 16 88 0.60
TR 99-60L-2 410 27200 60 99 305 130 254 M16 16 88 1.10
TR 99-60L-3 615 40800 60 99 457 130 406 M16 16 88 1.75
TR 99-60L-4 820 54400 60 99 610 130 559 M16 16 88 2.35
TR 99-60L-5 1025 68100 60 99 762 130 711 M16 16 88 2.90
TR 99-60L-6 1230 81700 60 99 914 130 864 M16 16 88 3.50
TR 99-60L-7 1435 95300 60 99 1067 130 1016 M16 16 88 4.10
TR 143-86L-1 575 31700 86 143 152 191 76 M16 16 127 1.25
TR 143-86L-2 1155 63500 86 143 305 191 203 M16 16 127 2.50
TR 143-86L-3 1730 95300 86 143 457 191 355 M16 16 127 3.80
TR 143-86L-4 2305 127100 86 143 610 191 508 M16 16 127 5.10
TR 143-86L-5 2880 158900 86 143 762 191 660 M16 16 127 6.40
TR 143-86L-6 3455 190600 86 143 914 191 812 M16 16 127 7.70
TR 143-86L-7 4030 224000 86 143 1067 191 965 M16 16 127 9.00
TR 188-108L-1 1350 40800 108 188 152 245 76 M16 16 165 2.15
TR 188-108L-2 2710 81700 108 188 305 245 203 M16 16 165 4.45
TR 188-108L-3 4060 122500 108 188 457 245 355 M16 16 165 6.70
TR 188-108L-4 5420 163400 108 188 610 245 508 M16 16 165 9.00
TR 188-108L-5 6770 204300 108 188 762 245 660 M16 16 165 11.20
TR 188-108L-6 8120 245100 108 188 914 245 812 M16 16 165 13.45
TR 188-108L-7 9480 286000 108 188 1067 245 965 M16 16 165 15.75
L
1
L
2
max.
Hub
A
M
C
D
B
Ordering Example TR 66-40L-2
TUBUS radial long
Outer- 66 mm
Stroke 40 mm
Length 2 = 305 mm
TUBUS-Series Type TR-L
Profile Damper Radial Damping (Long Version)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
77
max.
Stroke
N
E
W
The Profile Damper Type TC from
the innovative ACE TUBUS Series is
Co-Polyester Elastomer. They have
been specially developed for Crane
equipment applications and fulfill the
international Industry standards
OSHA and CMAA.
Many crane applications require a
spring rate with a high return force.
This is achieved with the unique Dual-
Profile Concept of the TC-S models.
For Energy-Management-Systems the
TC model types provide a cost effi-
cient solution with a high return force
capability.
The very small and light package size
from 64 mm up to 176 mm covers
an energy absorption capacity ranging
from 450 Nm up to 12720 Nm/cycle.
The excellent resistance to UV, sea-
water chemical and microbe attack
together with the wide operating tem-
perature range from - 40C to 90C
enables a wide range of applications.
Life expectancy is extremely high;
up to twenty times longer than for
urethane dampers, up to ten times
longer than rubber buffers and up to
five times longer than steel springs.
3
rating by +40%.
Energy absorption:
31% to 63%
Material hardness rating:
Shore 55D
up to max. 5 m/s
M12: 85 Nm
M16: 210 Nm
Mounting Screw
One-Piece
Profile Body
TUBUS-Series Type TC
Profile Damper for Crane Equipment
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
78
78
*W
3
max. Stroke Weight
Type Nm/cycle mm D L1 M L2 d1 d2 in kg
TC 64-62-S 450 62 64 12 M12 79 89 52 0.2
TC 74-76-S 980 76 74 12 M12 96 114 61 0.25
TC 83-73-S 1900 73 83 12 M12 94 127 69 0.3
TC 86-39 1210 39 86 12 M12 56 133 78 0.25
TC 90-49 1630 49 90 12 M12 68 124 67 0.25
TC 100-59 1770 59 100 12 M12 84 149 91 0.5
TC 102-63 1970 63 102 16 M16 98 140 82 0.5
TC 108-30 1900 30 108 12 M12 53 133 77 0.35
TC 117-97 3710 97 117 16 M16 129 188 100 1.0
TC 134-146-S 7290 146 134 16 M16 188 215 117 1.6
TC 136-65 4250 65 136 16 M16 106 178 106 1.1
TC 137-90 6350 90 137 16 M16 115 216 113 1.1
TC 146-67-S 8330 67 146 16 M16 118 191 99 1.5
TC 150-178-S 8860 178 150 16 M16 241 224 132 2.6
TC 153-178-S 7260 178 153 16 M16 226 241 131 2.3
TC 168-124 10100 124 168 16 M16 166 260 147 2.3
TC 176-198-S 12720 198 176 16 M16 252 279 150 3.6
d
1
d
2
D
L
1
L
2
max.
Hub
M
Ordering Example TC 83-73-S
TUBUS Crane Buffer
Outer- 83 mm
Stroke 73 mm
Model type soft
1800
1500
1200
900
600
300
0
E
n
e
r
g
y

(
N
m
)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Stroke (mm)
Example: With impact energy of 1300 Nm the Energy-Stroke diagram shows that a stroke of about 38 mm is needed. On the
Force-Stroke diagram you can estimate the proportion of absorbed energy to rebound energy at this stroke length.
Note: with these types the return force towards the end of the stroke is significant and we recommend you try to use a mini-
mum of 90% of the total stroke available.
<

rebound stroke
energy
F
back
Characteristics of Type TC 90-49
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
F
in
absorbed
energy
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Stroke (mm)
Model type TC-S Model type TC
TUBUS-Series Type TC
Profile Damper for Crane Equipment
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
79
Hub
max.
Stroke
d
1
d
2
D
L
1
L
2
Hub
M
max.
Stroke
Besides the standard product range of the TUBUS-series
there are also a large number of special products avail-
able upon request for customer-specific applications.
Energy Capacity Operating Lifetime Energy Capacity
per unit weight per unit volume
PUR 80A PUR 90A Rubber 80A TUBUS
Physical Properties of TUBUS Profile Dampers
ACE TUBUS Profile Dampers are high performance
damping elements made from a special Co-Polyester
Elastomer.They have a high energy absorbing capacity
compared with other materials.
The TUBUS-series comprises 5 main types with over
80 individual models.
The excellent damping characteristics are achieved as
a result of the special elastomer material and the
worldwide patented construction design. This enables
us to change the characteristics of the elastomer
material so that individual and distinct damping cur-
ves are possible.
TUBUS dampers offer a considerable performance
advantage when compared to other materials such as
rubber, urethanes and steel springs.
A further advantage compared to other damping ele-
ments is the operating life expectancy up to twenty
times longer than with urethane dampers, up to ten
times longer than with rubber dampers and up to five
times longer than with steel spring dampers.
The innovative TUBUS dampers absorb energy while
exhibiting the following damping characteristics:
Model Type TA: Degressive characteristic with max.
energy absorption (coloured area) with min. stroke.
Energy absorption: 40 % to 66 %.
Model Type TS: Almost linear characteristic with low
reaction force over a short operating stroke.
Energy absorption: 26 % to 56 %.
Model Type TR/TR-L: Progressive characteristic with
gradually increasing reaction force over a long stroke.
Energy absorption TR: 17% to 35%
Energy absorption TR-L: 14% to 26%
For the crane industry we manufacture special high
capacity crane buffers that have an ideal deceleration
characteristic with high return force for this type of appli-
cation and energy capacities from 450 to 12720 Nm. This
means you can have a TUBUS crane buffer capable of
providing up to 900kN of braking force in a package only
weighing 3kg and absorbing up to 50% of the energy.
The material does not absorb water or swell and it is highly
resistant to abrasion. Products of the TUBUS-series will
work at temperatures of -40C up to 90C and are resistant
to grease, oil, petroleum fluids, microbe and chemical
attack and sea water. They also have good UV and ozone
resistance. The very long service life of up to one million
cycles, the compact size and the low unit weight differen-
tiate the TUBUS profile dampers from all other types of
elastomer damping elements.
If you are looking for an economic damping solution where
the load does not need to be decelerated to an exact
datum position and you do not need 100 % absorption
of the impact energy then TUBUS dampers are a real alter-
native to hydraulic end position damping. They are the
preferred solution for end stop dampers in robotic systems,
high bay warehouse systems and all similar automated
plant and machinery.
TUBUS-series
Overview of Profile Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
80
Characteristics of dynamic energy absorption for impact
velocity over 0.5 m/s. For impact velocities under 0.5 m/s,
please request a static characteristic curve.
TA
TS
TR/TR-L
F
o
r
c
e
Stroke
Comparison of Damping Characteristics
Special Dampers
TUBUS-Series
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
81
81
Safety with ultra high speed operation
Consistent, safe operation of a weigh feeder
ACE TUBUS Profile Dampers protect the integrated
loading station on a new high speed machining centre.
The ACE TUBUS damper is designed to prevent over-
run on the high speed loading station of a Camshaft
machining centre used in the automobile industry. In
the event that the drive train fails during operation
or incorrect data is inputted the ACE TUBUS damper
absorbs the impact preventing costly damage to
the machine. The TA-98-40 TUBUS damper impressed
engineers with its exceptionally long service life in
operation.
When used as an emergency stop the TUBUS damper
can absorb up to 63 % of the impact energy.
ACE TUBUS Profile Dampers prevent impact problems
between the different directions of motion on a weigh
feeder.
The illustrated weigh feeder is a critical production
component and must always function correctly. A pre-
vious history of machine damage caused by the cros-
sing of different motions in operation was eliminated
by the use of TUBUS type TA 22-10 profile dampers.
Due to the co-polyester construction of TUBUS dampers
a degressive damping curve could be engineered to
suit the application. The combination of superior
damage protection, small size and economic cost
made the TUBUS damper the ideal solution for this
critical application.
Safe end position damping
Safe reliable cycling
ACE Rotary Dampers are sealed main-
tenance free units. They are available
with fixed or adjustable damping
rates. The damping can be clockwise,
anticlockwise or in both directions.
The outer body is either plastic or metal
depending upon model size. The out-
put connection can be direct onto the
keyed output shaft or indirect via a
plastic gear (available with 4 standard
modules). Plastic rack with modules of
0.5 to 1 are also available.
Applications include office machinery,
lids and flaps, floppy disc drives, piano
lids, CD players, auto glove-boxes,
vending machines, medical equip-
ment, furniture industry and
a multitude of others.
ACE Rotary Dampers guarantee the smooth controlled
opening and closing of small lids, covers and flaps. They
can be mounted directly on the pivot axis or can be used
to provide linear damping by using a plastic gear and rack.
They enable mechanisms to operate with a smooth con-
trolled motion giving that touch of quality to whatever
product they are used on. ACE rotary dampers are filled
with a special high viscosity fluid (silicone type) and sealed
for life. The fluid is passed through an orifice or groove by
a rotating vane to provide damping resistance. The damp-
ing torque generated is determined by the fluid viscosity
and by the orifice configuration.
Lifetime: With a max.
rotational speed of 50
revs/min and a maxi-
mum of 10 cycles/min
(12 cycles/min with
the FDT/FDN types)
the rotary dampers
still provide more than
80% of their damping
torque after a run of
50000 cycles.
Keyed Output Shaft
Damping Vane
Damping Orifice
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
Rotary Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
82
82
Material: Polycarbonate plastic
Temperature range: 0C to 50C
Gear data
Tooth: Involute
Module: 0.6*
Pressure angle: 20
No. of teeth: 10
P.C.D.: 6 mm
* A 250 mm long plastic rack is available for use with this part see page 89.
14 +/-0,05 2 + 0,05
2,1
2,6
!2,5 +/-0,05
!10
2,1
6
!
19
1,5
3
2,5
6
!7,2
(5,5)
Damping action in both clockwise and anti-clockwise direction
without gear with gear Damping torque Ncm
(Nominal 20 rpm. 23C)
FRT-E2-100 FRT-E2-100-G1 0.1 +/- 0.05
FRT-E2-200 FRT-E2-200-G1 0.2 +/- 0.07
FRT-E2-300 FRT-E2-300-G1 0.3 +/- 0.08
FRT-E2-400 FRT-E2-400-G1 0.4 +/- 0.10
FRT-E2 (Bi-directional)
FRT-G2 (Bi-directional)
FRT-G2-200 FRT-G2-200-G1 0.20 +/- 0.07
FRT-G2-300 FRT-G2-300-G1 0.30 +/- 0.08
FRT-G2-450 FRT-G2-450-G1 0.45 +/- 0.10
FRT-G2-600 FRT-G2-600-G1 0.60 +/- 0.12
FRT-G2-101 FRT-G2-101-G1 1.00 +/- 0.20
2,6
19 +/-0,05
2,1
2,1
7
2,5 + 0,05
! 15
!3,6 +/-0,05
!
! 8
24
2,2
3,7
2,5
6,6
(5,4)
Models available FRT-E2 . . .
Damping action in both clockwise and anti-clockwise direction
without gear with gear Damping torque Ncm
(Nominal 20 rpm. 23C)
Models available FRT-G2 . . .
Dims. in ( ) without gear
Dims. in ( ) without gear
FRT-E2 (at 23C) FRT-E2 (at 20 rpm)
FRT-G2 (at 23C) FRT-G2 (at 20 rpm) Material: Polycarbonate plastic
Gear data
Tooth: Involute
Module: 0.5*
Pressure angle: 20
No. of teeth: 14
P.C.D.: 7 mm
* A 250 mm long plastic rack is available for use with this part see page 89.
rpm
rpm
Rotary Dampers FRT-E2 and FRT-G2
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
83
Models available FRT-C2 . . .
Gear data
Tooth: Involute
Module: 0.8*
Pressure angle: 20
No. of teeth: 11
P.C.D.: 8.8 mm
* A 170 mm long flexible plastic rack and a 250 mm long rigid model are available for use with this part see page 89.
!15
21 3,5+/-0,02
3,2
8
!4 -0,05
!10,4 27,5
1,5
4,5
7
14
FRT-C2 and FRN-C2
FRT-D2 and FRN-D2
N
c
m
N
c
m
Gear data
Tooth: Involute
Module: 1.0*
Pressure angle: 20
No. of teeth: 12
P.C.D.: 12.75 mm
* A 250 mm and 500 mm long plastic rack is available for use with this part see page 89.
!25
40 4 +/-0,02
!5 -0,05
!4,2
R5
!14,75
50
2
5
11
19
Models available FRT-D2 . . .
Model Bi-directional Right-hand damping Left-hand damping Damping torque Ncm
damping (clockwise) (anti-clockwise) (Nominal 20 rpm. 23C)
without gear FRT-C2-201 FRN-C2-R201 FRN-C2-L201 2 +/- 0.6
without gear FRT-C2-301 FRN-C2-R301 FRN-C2-L301 3 +/- 0.8
with gear FRT-C2-201-G1 FRN-C2-R201-G1 FRN-C2-L201-G1 2 +/- 0.6
with gear FRT-C2-301-G1 FRN-C2-R301-G1 FRN-C2-L301-G1 3 +/- 0.8
damping (clockwise) (anti-clockwise) (Nominal 20 rpm. 23C)
without gear FRT-D2-501 FRN-D2-R501 FRN-D2-L501 5 +/- 1
with gear FRT-D2-501-G1 FRN-D2-R501-G1 FRN-D2-L501-G1 5 +/- 1
FRT/N-C2 (at 23C) FRT/N-C2 (at 20 rpm)
FRT/N-D2 (at 23C) FRT/N-D2 (at 20 rpm)
rpm
rpm
Rotary Dampers FRT/FRN-C2 and -D2
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
84
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
85
H
2
h
2
d
1
D
1
D
2
d
2
t = Breite
-0,01
-0,03
!5,2
!6
R5,5
47
36
5 +/-0,05 !40
5 16
29,5
42
10
1,5
!13,5
Weight max.: 0.116 kg
FRT/FRN-K2 and FRT/FRN-F2
FFD
Models available FRT-F2 . . .
damping clockwise anti-clockwise (Nominal 20 rpm. 23C)
FRT-K2-502 FRN-K2-R502 FRN-K2-L502 50 +/- 10
FRT-K2-103 FRN-K2-R103 FRN-K2-L103 100 +/- 20
FRT-F2-203 FRN-F2-R203 FRN-F2-L203 200 +/- 40
FRT-F2-303 300 +/- 80
FRT-F2-403 400 +/-100
Models available FFD- . . .
Damping Model Damping torque Dimensions Flange Type Standard Type
direction in Nm D
1
D
2
H
1
h
1
L
1
L
2
d
1
d
2
H
2
h
2
t
unidirectional FFD-25 0.1/ 0.5 / 1.0 25 6 13 3 42 34 21 6.2 16 4 4
unidirectional FFD-28 0.1/ 0.5 / 1.0 28 8 13 3 44 36 24 8.2 16 4 4
unidirectional FFD-30 0.1/ 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 30 10 13 3 46 38 26 10.2 16 4 4
bi-directional FFD-25 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 25 6 19 3 42 34 21 6.2 22 4 4
bi-directional FFD-28 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 28 8 19 3 44 36 24 8.2 22 4 4
bi-directional FFD-30 1.5 / 2.0 / 2.5 / 3.0 30 10 19 3 46 38 26 10.2 22 4 4
FRT-K2 and -F2 (at 23C) FRT-K2 and -F2 (at 20 rpm)
L
2
! 3,2
H
1
h
1
L
1
D
1
D
2
rpm C
Rotary Dampers FRT/FRN-K2 and -F2
and FFD
N
E
W
t = Thickness
Rotational speed max.: 30 rpm
Cycle rate max.: 13 cycles per min.
Recommended Shaft details: !
+0
0,03
Damping torque
102 = 0.1 Nm
502 = 0.5 Nm
103 = 1.0 Nm
153 = 1.5 Nm
203 = 2.5 Nm
303 = 3.0 Nm
Flange Type Standard Type
Ordering Example FFD-25-FS-L-102
Friction Damper
Body !
Mounting Style (Flange = F, Standard = S)
Damping Option (unidirec. = S, bi-direc. = W)
Damping Direction (right = R, left = L)
(omitted when bi-directional damping)
Damping torque see chart
!18,2 ! 26
26
10
5
40
5
13
3,8
! 10
6 -0,05
R 4
27
35
45
15
27
! 3,5
Material: Black polycarbonate
Max. Rotation angle: 108
Return travel damping: 100 Ncm
Weight: 0.035 kg
Do not use damper as final end stop.
Fit external mechanical stops at each end of travel.
FYN-K1
rechtsdrehend
Endposition
linksdrehend
1
0
8
1
0
8
dmpfend
dmpfend
right-hand
damping
End position
Models available FYN-K1 . . .
Model Right-hand damping Left-hand damping Damping torque
(clockwise) (anti-clockwise) Ncm
FYN-K1-R FYN-K1-L 400
1
,2
110
20
2
8
-0
,1
Schwenkwinkel
! 16-0,2
22
16
3
2
20
! 20 ! 12-0,2
12
Material: Black polycarbonate
Weight: 0.012 kg
Max. Rotation angle: 110
left-hand
damping
rotation
Models available FYN-N1 . . .
Model Right-hand damping Left-hand damping Damping torque Return Damping torque
(clockwise) (anti-clockwise) Ncm Ncm
FYN-N1-R103 FYN-N1-L103 100 20
FYN-N1-R203 FYN-N1-L203 200 40
FYN-N1-R253 FYN-N1-L253 250 40
FYN-N1-R303 FYN-N1-L303 300 80
With ! 18mm body on request.
FYN-N1
Rotary Dampers FYN-N1 and FYN-K1
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
86
Coloured end cap for identification
of the damping direction.
Also available with a damping torque
of 250 Ncm!
N
E
W
2
4
8-0,1
Endkappe wei: linksdrehend dmpfend
schwarz: rechtsdrehend dmpfend
white end cap: left-hand damping
black end cap: right-hand damping
Rotary Dampers FYT/FYN-H1 and -LA3
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
87
80
70
96 6
! 6,5 12,5-0,05
210
Schwenkwinkel
11
56
66
M5
105 Schwenkwinkel
6 -0,03
!45
20 15 30
18
!8
6
!24
P
Einstellschraube
!17
! 80
78
48
3
12
15
12
!50
P
Einstellschraube
Material: Zinc diecast, steel shaft
Max. rotation: 105
Return travel damping: 0.5 Nm
Maximum side-load: 50 N
Weight: 0.24 kg
A play of approx. 5 can occur at the beginning of
movement.
Material: Zinc diecast, steel shaft
Max. rotation angle: 210
Return travel damping: 4 Nm
Maximum side-load: 200 N
Weight: 1.75 kg
A play of approx. 5 can occur at the beginning of
movement.
FYT-H1 and FYN-H1
FYT-LA3 and FYN-LA3
Keyed output shaft shown
in mid-travel position.
Keyed output shaft shown
in mid-travel position.
Models available FYT-H1 . . .
Model Bi-directional Right-hand damping Left-hand damping Damping torque Nm
damping (clockwise) (anti-clockwise) (adjustable)
Adjustable FYT-H1 FYN-H1-R FYN-H1-L 2...10
Models available FYT-LA3 . . .
Model Bi-directional Right-hand damping Left-hand damping Damping torque Nm
damping (clockwise) (anti-clockwise) (adjustable)
Adjustable FYT-LA3 FYN-LA3-R FYN-LA3-L 4...40
Adjusting screw
rotation
rotation
Adjusting screw
Max. side load
Max. side load
Body material: Steel. Output shaft sleeve: Nylon (glass reinforced)
Operating fluid: Silicone Oil
Cycle rate max.: 12 cycles per min.
There is no support for the output shaft
within the damper structure. External
support must be provided for the shaft.
FDT-47 to 70
FDN-47 to 70
Damping in both directions of rotation
Damping torque Nm
(at 20 rpm, 23C)
Dimensions
A B C D E F G H R V
FDT-47 2.0 +/- 0.3 65 56 8 4.5 47 42.8 1.6 10.3 4.5 10
FDT-57 4.7 +/- 0.5 79 68 10 5.5 57 52.4 1.6 11.2 5.5 13
FDT-63 6.7 +/- 0.7 89 76 12.5 6.5 63 58.6 1.6 11.3 6.5 17
FDT-70 8.7 +/- 0.8 95 82 12.5 6.5 70 65.4 1.6 11.3 6.5 17
Models available FDT- . . .
Body material: Steel. Output shaft sleeve: Nylon (glass reinforced)
Operating fluid: Silicone Oil
Cycle Rate max.: 12 cycles per min.
There is no support for the output shaft
within the damper structure. External
support must be provided for the shaft.
Recommended shaft details:
for FDN-47 ! 6
+0
0,03
for FDN-57 to FDN-70 ! 10
+0
0,03
Hardness > HRC55, surface smoothness R
z
< 1
m
N
m
U/min 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
0
2
4
6
8
10
FDT-47
FDT-57
FDT-63
FDT-70
N
m
C 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
0
2
4
6
8
10
FDT-47
FDT-57
FDT-63
FDT-70
rpm
Model
Righthand damping
(clockwise)
Lefthand damping
(anti-clockwise)
Damping torque
Nm
Dimensions
A B C D E F G H R
FDN-47-R FDN-47-L 2.0 +/- 0.3 65 56 6 4.5 47 42.8 1.6 10.3 4.5
FDN-57-R FDN-57-L 5.5 +/- 0.6 79 68 10 5.5 57 52.4 1.6 14 5.5
FDN-63-R FDN-63-L 8.5 +/- 0.8 89 76 10 6.5 63 58.6 1.6 13.9 6.5
FDN-70-R FDN-70-L 10.0 +/- 1.0 95 82 10 6.5 70 65.4 1.6 13 6.5
Models available FDN- . . .
A B C
R
D
F
H
E
G
A B
R
!C
!D
H
!E
G
!F
Rotary Dampers FDT/FDN-47 to 70
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
88
C
!
V
-0,02
-0,1
-
0
,
1
0
Recommended
Drive Shaft Size
You can change the
direction of the
damping torque,
if necessary,
by pushing out
and turning the
bearing bush!
At 23 C At 20 rev/min.
Damping Direction
right hand damping = damping action in clockwise
direction when looking onto the output shaft.
Accessories
Toothed plastic rack with modules 0.5 to 1 available.
A
C
B
Calculation of Rotary Damper for a Lid
m = Mass of Lid (kg)
L = Length of Lid from pivot (cm.)
n = Rotation speed (r.p.m.)
g = Acceleration due to gravity (= 9.81)
Calculation Steps
1) Calculate max. torque damper will be exposed to.
(with example shown max torque is at a = 0)
2) Decide upon rotation speed desired.
3) Choose a rotary damper from catalogue that can
handle the torque calculated above.
4) With the aid of the damper performance curves,
check if the r.p.m. given at your torque corresponds
to the desired closing speed of the lid.
5) If the r.p.m. is too high Choose a damper with
a higher torque rating.
If the r.p.m. is too low Choose a damper with
a lower torque rating.
Closing Torque T
T = L / 2 m g cos a Ncm.
Note: for a uniform lid assume centre
of gravity is at distance L/2 from pivot.
Side loading End loading Angular offset Misalignment
Mountings to avoid:
The output shaft should not be exposed to side loading.
Toothed Rack M 0.5, M 0.6, M 0.8, M1.0
Toothed Rack M 0.8 P
Rotary Damper Calculation
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
89
N
E
W
Models available
A
mm
B
mm
C
mm
Model Toothed Rack
M 0.5 250 4 6 rigid, milled
M 0.8 P 170 8 4.1 flexibel, milled
M 1.0 250 10 10 flexibel, milled
M 1.0 500 10 10 flexibel, milled
Metal racks available on request.
A
2,3
B
!4,5
C
145,8
160
ACE Rotary Dampers take the weight.
With this agricultural machine the yield of a certain
plot is continuously measured to provide optimum
packing of the bales according to the prevailing
growth conditions.
The crop is collected and weighed on a continuous
basis by means of a damped pendulum arm and load
cell. The load cell output is electronically processed
and controls the packing of individual bales.
The pendulum/load cell system is damped to provide
a consistent noise free output signal by means of four
ACE rotary dampers type FRT-F1.
Controlling
rotary motion
Controlling
pendulum swing
ACE Rotary Dampers installed in VIP lounges in the
new Hong Kong Airport Terminal.
This modern information counter consists of a central
support console with two fold away counter surfaces.
With the counter surfaces folded up the passenger can
check flight and baggage details on the built in monitor
and keyboard. A PC and printer are housed in the central
support console. After use the counter surfaces can be
folded down out of the way for easier passenger access.
To provide smooth and safe operation of this sophisti-
cated equipment, model FYN-H1 ACE rotary dampers
were installed at the pivot axis of the counter tops.
Stand console in airport terminal
Compact combine harvester
Rotary Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
90
Damping lever motions
Vibration damping
No paper jams with ACE Rotary Dampers!
This highly sophisticated sorting machine scans bank
documents such as transfer vouchers, remittance
and debit notes, cheques and paying in slips etc. be-
fore further electronic processing. To ensure that each
document is in the correct position for scanning it is
pushed against a datum surface with a spring loaded
guide.
The guide is so precisely damped by an ACE FRN-D2
rotary damper that the documents remain undistorted
and undamaged and always sit in the exact datum
position for error-free scanning.
ACE Rotary Dampers protect the keyboard.
To provide long term protection in arduous and
often dirty industrial applications (and also to protect
against unauthorised access) the machine keyboard
is installed in a lockable and pivoted housing cabinet.
ACE rotary dampers type FRN-F1 were installed on
the pivot axis to provide a smooth controlled motion
to the keyboard as it is pulled down into its operating
position. The damper also prevents overloading the
hinge system and prevents damage to the keyboard,
the housing cabinet and the hinges.
High speed scanner for bank documents
Pivoted machine keyboard
Rotary Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
91
Precision Hydraulic Feed Controls VC
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
92
92 ACE Precision Feed Controls provide exact speed control
for machine motion. They are self-contained, maintenance
free, leakproof, temperature stable and stick-slip free. The
rolling diaphragm seal provides a hermetically sealed unit
and also provides an integral accumulator for the oil dis-
placed during operation. The high precision, adjustable
metering system can provide accurate feed rates from as
little as 12 mm/min with
low propelling forces.
Applications include
saws, cutters, drill
feeds, grinding and
boring machines in the
plastics, metal, wood
and glass industries.
Piston Rod
Rod Bearing
Positive Stop
Rolling Diaphragm Seal
Piston
Outer Body
Return Spring
Pressure Chamber
Feed Rate Adjustment
Fine Filter
ACE VC Precision Feed Controls are
sealed hydraulic units fitted with a
high precision metering element.
When the piston rod is depressed the
hydraulic oil is forced through the
adjustable precision metering orifice.
This provides a constant and precise
feed control throughout the stroke
length. The feed rate can be adjusted
over a wide range by turning the
external adjuster knob at the rear end
of the unit. The threaded outer body
makes installation and the adjustment
of feed control travel limits very
simple.
FA, MA and MVC are similar feed
control units intended for applications
where the higher precision of the VC
series is not required.
For precise adjustment
of the feed rate!
Precision Hydraulic Feed Controls VC
With Fine Adjustment
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
93
Operating Range VC
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
6 12 24 36 6 24 6 12 12 24 24 36 36 36 6 12
x 1 x 10 x100 x 1000
VC 2515 - 25125
25,4 19,1
Mounting with clamp mount MB 25
Installed with switch stop collar inc. proximity
switch and steel button: AS 25 plus PS 25
Bulkhead mounting for VC25 F with mounting
block KB ... (23.8 mm Plain body option)
Alternative Circlip Grooves
Technical Data
VC precision feed controls
Feed rate range: min. 0.013 m/min with 400 N propelling
force. Maximum 38 m/min with 3500 N propelling force.
Do not rotate piston rod, if excessive rotation force is
applied rolling seal may rupture (only applies to VC 2515
to VC 2555).
Outer body: Plain body 23.8 mm dia. (without thread)
is also available.
Nylon button PP-600 can be fitted onto piston rod.
Unit may be mounted in any position.
When mounting take care not to damage the adjuster knob.
Temperature range: 0C to 60C.
Impact velocity: Avoid high impact velocities. At speeds
of 0.3 m/s the maximum allowed energy is approx. 1 Nm
for units up to 55 mm stroke and approx. 2 Nm for units
75 mm to 125 mm stroke. Where higher energies occur
use a shock absorber for the initial impact.
Material: Body heavy duty steel tube with black oxide.
Piston rod with hard chrome plating.
In contact with petroleum base oils or cutting fluids
specify optional neoprene rolling seal or install air bleed
adaptor type SP 25.
Suffix "FT" signifies a M25x1.5 threaded body.
Suffix "F" signifies a plain body 23.8 mm dia. (without thread) also available, with optional clamp type mounting block.
For VC2515,30 and 55 use 250-0220. For VC2575,100 and 125 use 250-0264.
Capacity Chart
Propelling Force N
VC 2515FT 15 128 80 30 - 3500 5 - 10 0.2 3 0.4
VC 2530FT 30 161 110 30 - 3500 5 - 15 0.4 2 0.5
VC 2555FT 55 209 130 35 - 3500 5 - 20 1.2 2 0.6
VC 2575FT 75 283 150 50 - 3500 10 - 30 0.3 2 0.8
VC 25100FT 100 308 150 60 - 3500 10 - 35 0.5 1 0.9
VC 25125FT 125 333.5 150 70 - 3500 10 - 40 0.6 1 1.0
Return force Reset time max. Side Weight
Model
Stroke A B N load angle
Part Number mm min - max min - max s o kg
Part Number VC 25 FT . . . MB 25
Mounting Examples
Installed with air bleed collar SP 25
! 14
A
B
Hub 13
Anschlag
mglich
! 8
KM 25 M25x1,5
Air Bleed Adaptor
for VC 2515 FT to VC 2555 FT Accessories, mounting, installation see pages 30 to 32. Clamp Mount
Stroke
Stop
P
r
o
p
e
l
l
i
n
g

F
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
Feed Rate mm/min
AF 25
SP 25
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
30 !
6,4 16
M25x1,5
SW23
3 !
Thickness
25 mm
AF23
! 4,8
4,6
!17
M20x1,5 13,5 SW18 8
88
SW23
19
30
Hub
AF18
Stroke
AF23
! 6,3
4,6
!23
M25x1,5 16,5 SW23 10
106,6 (138)
SW30
25,4 (40)
36,4 (51)
Hub
Stroke
AF23 AF30
4 Hub SW12
8
51
M10x1
14,5
!2,5
!6
11
M10x1
12,5
20
10
!
10 !
25
14
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M10x1
M4
16
5
Hub SW14
10
66 18
! 3,2
!7,7 M12x1
5
Einstellschraube
32
16
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M12x1
M5
20
40
25
6
Breite
20 mm
M20x1,5
M6
28
46
32
6
Breite
25 mm
M25x1,5
M6
34
Adjustment screw
Dimensions for MVC 900 M in ()
FA 1008 V-B
MA 35 M RF 12 MB 12
MVC 225 M RF 20 MB 20
MVC 600 M and MVC 900 M RF 25 MB 25
Part Number
Stop Collar Rectangular Flange Clamp Mount
RF 10 MB 10 AH 10
AF12 Stroke
AF14
Stroke
Thickness
25 mm
Thickness
20 mm
Thickness
12 mm
Thickness
10 mm
Feed Controls FA/MA/MVC
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
94
25
12
3,5
Breite
10 mm
M8x1
M4
16
Thickness
10 mm
Part Number MA . . .
MA 30 M
RF 8 MB 8 SC
2
3 Hub SW 10
8
48 13,1
! 3,2
!6,4 M8x1
4,1
Einstellschraube
Stroke
AF10
Adjustment screw
25
14
6
M8x1
18
M4x10
N
E
W
!4,8
4,7
!12 M14x1,5 7,5 SW12 6
70
SW17
12,5
22,5
Hub
Einstellschraube
Adjustment screw
Stroke
AF12 AF17
32
20
4,5
Breite
12 mm
M14x1,5
M5
20
Thickness
12 mm
MA 150 M RF 14 MB 14
34
20
6
M14x1,5
26
M5x12
46
32
8
M20x1,5
36
M6x14
52
32
8
M25x1,5
42
M6x14
32
20
6
M12x1
24
M5x12
28
14
6
M10x1
20
M4x10
A high force is necessary at the start of drilling when
the drill first contacts the sheet.
After the initial cut this high force causes the drill to
break through. This results in jagged edges rather than
a smooth clean hole and also causes tool breakage.
By installing an ACE VC Feed Control it is possible to
precisely control the rate of drill advance. As a result
the drilled holes are clean and consistent and drill
breakage is considerably reduced.
Varying material types, hardness and wear on the
saw blade causes the cutting pressure to vary greatly.
However the saw advance speed should remain con-
stant as changes cause breakage of the material being
cut or of the saw blade.
An ACE VC Feed Control fitted directly to the cutting
head provides a simple and low cost solution. The
cutting speed remains constant and can be easily preset.
Drilling Sheet Metal Sawing Aluminium and
Plastic Profiles
Pneumatic
Cylinder
Drill Spindle
Precision
Feed Control
Precision
Feed Control
Striker
Drive
Precision
Feed Control
Saw Blade
Profile
Capacity Chart
Propelling Force N
Stroke
mm
Return force
N
Reset time
s
*max. Side
load angle
Weight
kg
Model
Part Number
min max min max
MA 30 M 8 8 - 80 1 - 5 0.3 2 0.025
FA 1008 V-B 8 10 - 180 3 - 6 0.3 2.5 0.026
MA 35 M 10 15 - 200 5 - 11 0.2 2 0.043
MA 150 M-B 12.5 20 - 300 3 - 5 0.4 5 0.06
MVC 225 M 19 25 - 1750 5 - 10 0.65 2 0.13
MVC 600 M 25 65 - 3500 10 - 30 0.85 2 0.31
MVC 900 M 40 70 - 3500 10 - 35 0.95 2 0.4
* For high side-load applications us Side Load Adaptor (BV) pages 28 to 31.
Technical Data
FA 1008 V to MVC 900 M
Install mechanical stop 0.5 1 mm before end of stroke on
model FA 1008 V-B.
Operating temperature range: FA 1008 V-B and MA 35 M:
0C to 70C. MVC 225 M and MVC 900 M: -12C to 90C.
Self-contained. Can be mounted in any position.
Max. impact velocity: Avoid high impact velocities. At speeds of
0.3 m/s the maximum allowed energy is approx. 2 Nm. Where
higher energies occur use a shock absorber for the initial impact.
Material: Steel body with black oxide finish.
Stainless steel piston rod.
Feed rate mm/min
P
r
o
p
e
l
l
i
n
g

f
o
r
c
e

(
N
)
Operating range MVC 225 to 900
4000
3500
2500
2000
3000
1500
1000
500
12 24 36 6 12 24 36 6 12 24 36 6 12 24 36
x1 x10 x100 x1000
MVC 600
and 900
MVC 225
Precision Feed Controls FA/MA/MVC
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
95
Hydraulic Speed/Feed Controls DVC-32
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
96
96
Piston Rod
Adjustment Knob
for Extension Speed
Rod Bearing
Accumulator
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
Thread for Mounting
Accessories
Rod Seal
Adjustment Knob
for Compression Speed
Hydraulic Speed/Feed Controls from
ACE are maintenance free, self-con-
tained sealed units for precise control
of speed in both directions of travel.
The travel speed can be adjusted inde-
pendantly in each direction of travel.
Applications include pick and place,
machine slides and guards, flaps and
hoods etc. The wide variety of mount-
ing accessories make the DVC easy
to install on many different types of
application.
Travel speed can be
adjusted independantly
in each direction
of travel!
Speed/Feed Controls DVC-32
Adjustable (Compression and Extension Forces 42 N to 2000 N)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
97
36
32
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
9
M8x1,25
8
30
20 L+/- 2 mm ausgefahren 20
! 14
! 8,1
14 !8
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
10 breit
!32 14
20 22
! 14
10
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 100 200 300
DVC-32-50
DVC-32-100
DVC-32-150
400
Maximum
Force
Speed mm/sec
Compression speed control chart
P
r
o
p
e
l
l
i
n
g

F
o
r
c
e

N
End Fitting Standard Dimensions End Fitting
Technical Data
Ordering Example DVC-32-50-DD-P
Type (DVC speed/feed controller)
Body (32 mm)
Stroke (50 mm)
Piston rod end fitting (D = Clevis fork)
Body end fitting (D = Clevis fork)
Damping direction (P = Both directions)
Damping Options
P = Damping in both directions (Standard Model)
M = Damping on out stroke
(Adjustment knob at rear end free flow)
N = Damping on in stroke
(Adjustment knob at piston rod end free flow)
The end fittings are interchangeable (except the fixed end version,
detailed below) and must be positively secured by the customer
to prevent unscrewing (i.e. Loctite). For mounting accessories
please see page 124.
Type Stroke
mm
L
max.
A
max.
B
DVC-32-50 50 240 42 2000 42 2000
DVC-32-50-XX 50 250 75.2 42 2000 42 2000
DVC-32-100 100 340 42 2000 42 1670
DVC-32-100-XX 100 350 124.4 42 2000 42 1670
DVC-32-150 150 440 42 2000 42 1335
DVC-32-150-XX 150 450 173.6 42 2000 42 1335
Propelling Force N
(Extension) (Compression)
min. max. min. max.
Dimensions
ACE speed/feed controls are self-contained and maintenance free.
Mechanical stops: Provide mechanical stop 1 to 1.5 mm before
end of each stroke direction.
Mounting position: Can be mounted in any position. The end
fittings must be positively secured to prevent unscrewing.
To special order: Special oils and external finishes. Uni-directional
damping (free flow in reverse direction). NOTE: End fittings should
be secured with Loctite or similiar.
Operating temperature: 0C to 65C.
Operating fluid: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) 42cSt. at 40C
Material: Body: black anodised aluminium. Piston rod: hard chrome
plated steel. End fittings: zinc plated steel.
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 400 300 200 100
1/8
offen
Max. Vorschubkraft bei Einstellung
1/2
offen
3/4
offen offen
Tension speed control chart
Speed mm/sec
P
r
o
p
e
l
l
i
n
g

F
o
r
c
e

N
E8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Swivel Eye E8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
Ball
R 7
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
10 thick
10 thick
6,4
A max
! 13
! 8
! 6
B
!32
! 14
10
30 30
! 6
12,7 breit
10
12,7 thick
A max.
Fixed End Fitting -XX
1/8
open
1/2
open
3/4
open open
Hydraulic Dampers HB-15 to HB-70
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
98
98
HB dampers can be mounted in any position. The body
has a black powder coated finish and the piston rod has a
special hard ceramic coating which provides an exceptio-
nally long lifetime and
excellent corrosion
protection.
An extended bearing
bush has been added
to the front assembly
to give additional
support to the main
bearing, providing
improved vibration
protection and a better
resistance to side
loads.
Piston Rod with
black ceramic
finish
Bearing bush
Main Bearing
Piston
Pressure Chamber
Outer Body
Thread for
Mounting
Accessories
Seals
Metering Orifice
HB Hydraulic Dampers from ACE are
maintenance-free self-contained and
sealed units.They are available with
body diameters from 15 mm up to
70 mm and with stroke lengths of up to
800 mm. As standard they are supplied
as doubleacting dampers but a single
acting version is also available. The
travel speed is adjustable and remains
constant throughout the stroke. (single
acting version is controllable in one
direction only, with free flow in the op-
posite direction). The new adjustment
segment on the piston makes sensitive
speed adjustment easy. ACEs HB hy-
draulic dampers sport the sleek design
already seen in our gas springs and
a wide range of screw on mounting
accessories make them very versatile
and easy to install. Typical applications
include machine guards and lids,
fire safety flaps and doors, damping
oscillations of suspended loads (Power
and Free Systems) etc.
Hydraulic Dampers HB-15
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
99
22
22
4,5
!13
!8
12
! 8
30
20
24
!10
!6
6
!5
10
5
6 20
10
5
M5x0,8
5
22
!10
! 6,1
10
16 L+/- 2 mm ausgefahren
+ max 6 mm Verstellweg
!6
! 6,1
Hub
Kugel
R 5
6 breit
16
6 breit
!15 10
22
M5x0,8
8
!13
!8
12
10
36
L = Hub + 20
!19
12
!13
4,5
10
30
12
Ordering Example HB-15-150-CC-M
Type (Hydraulic Damper)
Body (15 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Piston Rod End Fitting C5
Body End Fitting C5
Damping Direction (M = out stroke only)
Damping options
M = Damping on out stroke only P = Damping in both directions
N = Damping on in stroke only X = Special model suffix
The end fittings are interchangeable and must be positively
secured by the customer to prevent unscrewing (i.e. Loctite).
For mounting accessories see page 123.
Type Stroke L max.
mm Extended Compression Force N
HB-15-25 25 90 800
HB-15-50 50 140 800
HB-15-75 75 190 800
HB-15-100 100 240 350
HB-15-150 150 340 300
Dimensions
PA5
OA5
NA5
MA5
NG5
G5
A5
C5
D5
E5
OG5
PG5
PA5
OA5
NA5
MA5
HB-15
E5
Ball Socket G5
G5
A5
B5
C5
D5
Angle Ball Joint C5
Clevis Fork D5
Swivel Eye E5
Eye A5
Stud Thread B5
W5-15
Rod Shroud
Technical Data
ACE hydraulic dampers are self-contained and
maintenance free.
Adjustment: Adjustment of the damping rate is
achieved by pulling (or pushing) the piston rod to its
fully extended (or compressed) position. Whilst still
pulling the piston rod turn it clockwise to increase
damping or anti-clockwise to decrease damping.
If the resistance increases noticeably, stop adjusting
to avoid damage. The adjustment can add a max. of
6 mm to the L dim. shown.
Free travel: Construction of standard damper results
in a free travel of approx 20% of total stroke when
changing travel direction.
Mechanical stops: Provide mechanical stops 1 to
1.5 mm before end of each stroke direction.
Mounting position: Can be mounted in any position.
End fittings must be positively secured to prevent
unscrewing.
Operating fluid: Hydraulic oil.
Material: Body: black powder coated steel. Piston rod:
ceramic coated steel. End fittings: zinc plated steel.
Separator piston (-T): Available as a special option
to remove free travel. Also provides extension force
of max. 50 N. Dimension L = 2.45 x stroke + 47 mm.
For mounting acces-
sories see page 123.
(Max. permitted
force 500 N)
(Max. permitted
force 500 N)
Ball
R 5
L+/- 2 mm extended
+ max 6 mm for adjustment setting
Stroke
L = Stroke + 20
6 thick
6 thick
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
100
30
30
6
!20
!13
15
! 13
36
32
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
9
M8x1,25
8
30
20
! 14
! 8,1
14 !8
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
10 breit
!22 14
L = Hub + 30
!28
Ordering Example HB-22-150-DD-M
Body (22 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Piston Rod End Fitting D8
Body End Fitting D8
Damping Options
Type Stroke L max.
HB-22-50 50 150 1800
HB-22-100 100 250 1800
HB-22-150 150 350 1800
HB-22-200 200 450 1000
HB-22-250 250 550 1000
Dimensions
HB-22
E8
G8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Swivel Eye E8
Ball Socket G8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
W8-22
Rod Shroud
Technical Data
maintenance free.
damping and anti-clockwise to decrease damping.
in a free travel of approx. 20% of stroke.
unscrewing.
Material: Body: powder coated steel. Piston rod:
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
PA8
OA8
NA8
MA8
NG8
G8
A8
C8
D8
E8
OG8
PG8
PE8
OE8
NE8
ME8
E8
Ball
R 7
L+/- 2 mm extended
Stroke
10 thick
10 thick
L = Stroke + 30
For mounting acces-
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
101
30
36
32
30
6
!20
!13
15
! 13
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
9
M8x1,25
8
30
20
L = Hub + 40
!32
! 14
! 8,1
14 !10
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
10 breit
!28 14
Ordering Example HB-28-150-DD-M
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Body End Fitting D8
Damping Options
Type Stroke L max.
HB-28-100 100 260 3000
HB-28-150 150 360 3000
HB-28-200 200 460 3000
HB-28-250 250 560 3000
HB-28-300 300 660 2500
HB-28-350 350 760 2000
HB-28-400 400 860 1500
HB-28-500 500 1060 1000
Dimensions
HB-28
Swivel Eye E8
E8
G8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Ball Socket G8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
W8-28
Rod Shroud
Technical Data
maintenance free.
damping and anti-clockwise to decrease damping.
Free travel: Construction of the standard damper
results in free travel of approx. 20% of stroke.
unscrewing.
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
PA8
OA8
NA8
MA8
NG8
G8
A8
C8
D8
E8
OG8
PG8
PE8
OE8
NE8
ME8
E8
Ball
R 7
L+/- 2 mm extended
Stroke
10 thick
10 thick
L = Stroke + 40
For mounting acces-
Adjustable (Compression and Extension Forces 30 N to 10 000 N)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
102
45
M14x1,5
20
!30
!22
25
28
36
45
56
!14
27
14
16 56
27
57
16
!20
!14
19
30
!26
13
18
57
18
15
M14x1,5
15
40
!25
! 14,1
21 !14
! 14,1
Hub
Kugel
R 12,5
14 breit
14 breit
!40 21
L = Hub + 40
!45
maintenance free.
pulling the piston rod turn it clockwise to increase or
anti-clockwise to decrease damping. If the resistance
increases noticeably, stop adjusting to avoid damage.
The adjustment can add a max. of 6 mm to the L dim.
shown.
in a free travel of approx. 20% of stroke when chang-
ing directions.
1.5 mm before end of stroke in each direction.
unscrewing.
(with special seals up to 120C).
Technical Data
Ordering Example HB-40-300-EE-N
Body (40 mm)
Stroke (300 mm)
Piston Rod End Fitting E14
Body End Fitting E14
Damping Direction (N = in stroke only)
Damping Options
Type Stroke L max.
HB-40-100 100 275 10000
HB-40-150 150 375 10000
HB-40-200 200 475 10000
HB-40-300 300 675 10000
HB-40-400 400 875 8000
HB-40-500 500 1075 6000
HB-40-600 600 1275 4000
HB-40-700 700 1475 3000
HB-40-800 800 1675 3000
Dimensions
HB-40
E14
A14
B14
C14
D14
Angle Ball Joint C14
Clevis Fork D14
Swivel Eye E14
Eye A14
Stud Thread B14
W14-40
Rod Shroud
(Max. permitted
force 3200 N)
ME14
A14
C14
D14
E14
ND14
ME14
Ball
R 12,5
L+/- 2 mm extended
Stroke
14 thick
14 thick
L = Stroke + 40
For mounting acces-
Adjustable (Compression and Extension Forces 2000 N to 50 000 N)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
103
100
!25
50
25
32 100
50
94
12
!34
!25
31
!42
40
22
30
94
30
+ max 8mm Verstellweg
!30
Hub
!70
M24x2
35
L = Hub + 50
!80
maintenance free.
pulling the piston rod turn it clockwise to increase or
anti-clockwise to decrease the damping. If the resis-
tance increases noticeably, stop adjusting to avoid
damage. The adjustment can add a max. of 8 mm to
the L dim. shown.
in a free travel of approx. 20% of stroke when chang-
ing travel direction.
1.5 mm before end of stroke in each direction.
unscrewing.
Material: Body: black powder coated steel or zinc
plated steel. Piston rod: hard chrome plated. End
fittings: zinc plated steel.
of max. 250 N. Increases dimension L + 150 mm.
Technical Data
ME24
D24
E24
ND24
HB-70
Ordering Example HB-70-300-EE-N
Body (70 mm)
Stroke (300 mm)
Damping Direction (N = in stroke only)
Damping Options
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
HB-70-100 100 320
HB-70-200 200 520
HB-70-300 300 720
HB-70-400 400 920
HB-70-500 500 1120
HB-70-600 600 1320
HB-70-700 700 1520
HB-70-800 800 1720
Dimensions
E24
B24
D24 Clevis Fork D24
Swivel Eye E24
Stud Thread B24
W24-70
Rod Shroud
L+/- 2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 50
For mounting acces-
Stroke B C
TD-28-50-50 50 50 220 402 150 1550 75 30 F Tooth Type
TD-28-70-70 70 70 260 482 200 1500 70 30 F Tooth Type
TD-28-100-100 100 100 220 502 250 1500 80 40 F Tooth Type
TD-28-120-120 120 120 208 410 250 3800 165 0 D Tooth Type
Damping Force
Q
max. N
L max.
Impact
Mass
max. kg
Energy
per Cycle W
3
max. Nm
Return
Force
max. N
Return Type Adjustment
Stroke A
Type
C
Damping Force
Q
max. N
L max.
Impact
Mass
max. kg
Energy
per Cycle W
3
max. Nm
Return
Force
max. N
Stroke
Type
Technical Data
ACE Door Dampers are single ended or double ended working
adjustable hydraulic shock absorbers providing a smooth deceler-
ation characteristic.
Application areas: Cushioning of Elevator doors, automatic and
sliding doors and similar applications.
Adjustment: Pull the piston rod fully out and turn the knurled rod
end button. This allows the damping to be separately adjusted for
each side. As a result of the adjustment mechanism the overall
length L can be increased by up to 4 mm.
Impact velocity range v: 0.1 to 2 m/s.
Strokes per Minute: max. 10
Material: Piston Rod: hard chrome plated steel. Cylinder body:
zinc plated steel.
On request: With different deceleration characteristics, special
stroke lengths, special seals etc.
Calculation: The calculation of the Energy capacity (W
3
) can be
done with the ACE selection software however be careful to ob
serve the max. limits on the impact mass and damping force.
For calculation examples see pages 13 to 15 .
! 28
C 14
! 23
25
! 8
M16x1
Hub A 14
! 23
M16x1
! 8
25
L ausgefahren
(+ max. 4 mm Verstellweg)
Hub B
! 28
C 14
! 23
25
! 8
M16x1
Hub
L 2 mm ausgefahren
(+ max. 4 mm Verstellweg)
Standard Dimensions TD-28
Standard Dimensions TDE-28
Ordering Example TD-28-50-50-F
Type (Door Damper)
Body (28 mm)
Stroke A (50 mm)
Stroke B (50 mm)
Return Type
(F = automatic return with return spring)
Return Type:
F = automatic return with return spring
D = without return spring. When one piston rod is pushed
in the piston rod at the other end is pushed out (thus
the damper must be impacted from alternate ends to
sequence correctly).
Ordering Example TDE-28-50
Type (Door Damper)
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (50 mm)
TDE-28-50 50 130 221 4000 2400 80 30
TDE-28-70 70 158 269 5600 2400 112 30
TDE-28-100 100 193 333 8000 2400 160 30
TDE-28-120 120 214 373 7000 2400 190 40
Door Damper TD-28 and TDE-28
Adjustable
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
104
L extended
(+ max. 4 mm for adjustment setting)
Stroke A
L 2 mm extended
(+ max. 4 mm for adjustment setting)
Stroke
Stroke B
Hydraulic Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
105
Hydraulic dampers bring the sled movement of this
textile machine to a gentle stop.
At the turning point of 130 kg reeling spools, a sled
should move up and down smoothly without causing
a collision at the end of stroke position. The solution
was provided by the hydraulic damper DVC-32-100.
A self-contained sealed unit, ready to install and main-
tenance free these units are ideal for precise control
of speeds in both directions of travel. The travel speed
is maintained throughout the entire stroke and can be
independantly adjusted in each direction of travel.
Thanks to their compact design and wide choice of
mounting accessories, these dampers could be easily
integrated into this machine.
Profile saw delivers perfectly clean-cut edges
Textile machine unreels threads even better
Clean-cut edges
Precise unreeling
Hydraulic dampers provide a clean cut.
This profile saw was designed to produce cut-outs in
aluminium profiles without generating the stick-slip
effect that can often be observed when using pneuma-
tic cylinders. This uneven motion can cause imprecise
edges due to jammed saw blades or slight movement
of the work-piece during cutting. Fitting the hydraulic
damper type HB 28-400-EE enabled this machine to
move smoothly along the cutting line to produce 50
precision cut workpieces per hour.
Industrial Gas Springs GS-8 to GS-70
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
106
106
ACE Industrial Gas Springs provide a maintenance free
sealed for life system, being filled with high pressure
nitrogen gas. The oil zone filling provides end position
damping and internal lubrication for a long lifetime. On
the extension stroke of the gas spring, for example when
opening a car tailgate, the nitrogen gas flows through the
metering orifice in the piston to provide a controlled
opening speed and the oil
zone provides damping
at the fully open position
to avoid impact damage.
The gas spring should be
mounted rod down for
this damping to be effec-
tive. On closing the tail-
gate the gas spring helps
support the weight. The
metering orifice controls
the extension and com-
pression velocities of the
gas spring.
Filled with High
Pressure Nitrogen Gas
Gas Valve
Precision Steel Tube
Powder Coated for
Corrosion Protection
Metering Orifice for Controlled Ex-
tension and Compression Velocities
Integral Grease Chamber
for Increased Lifetime
The ACE Gas Spring range includes
Push Type, Pull Type (traction) and
Lockable Gas Springs all designed for
the industrial environment.
ACE Industrial Gas Springs are maint-
enance free and self contained. They
are available with body diameters from
8 mm up to 70 mm, and forces from
10 N up to 13 000 N ex. stock. The new
ACE Gas Springs offer a high service
life with a hard ceramic coating on the
piston rod. Also an integrated low
friction bearing with a grease chamber
which provides a very low break away
force. All of which are superior to a
conventional gas spring. It also allows
them to be mounted in any orientation,
although rod downwards is preferable
if you want to take advantage of the
built-in end position damping. The
optional valve allows the force to be
adjusted to your specific requirements.
A wide variety of interchangeable end
fittings makes installation easy and
versatile. They are universally appli-
cable wherever you have lifting and
lowering. They remove the need for
muscle power and provide con-
trolled motion for lids, hoods, machine
guards etc. The ACE Selection Soft-
ware quickly specifies the correct gas
spring for your individual application
and we can deliver, usually within
24 hours. ACE Traction Gas springs
work in the pull direction and are
available with body diameters of
19 mm and 28 mm. ACE Lockable
Gas springs can be locked or un-
locked anywhere through their stroke
length. They are available in rigid
or spring locking versions
with forces up to 1300 N. The
lock release can be operated
by a remote hydraulic push-
button or manually oper-
ated.
Oil Zone for End Position Damping
and Lubrication (Recommended
mounting position: piston rod down-
wards)
Low Friction
Bearing
Force adjustable to your
specific requirements
with gas valve
ex. stock!
Piston Rod with
Hard Ceramic
Coating
Function, Calculation and Mounting Tips
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
107
GS-8 28 10
GS-10 20 10
GS-12 25 20
GS-15 27 20
GS-19 36 - 42*** 30
GS-22 39 - 50*** 30
GS-28 60 - 95*** 40
GS-40 47 - 53*** 50
GS-70 25 50
GBF-28 50 60
GBS-28 50 60
Model Progression* FrictionF
R
**
approx. % approx. in N
GZ-19 10 30
GZ-28 20 40
Model Progression* Friction F
R
**
approx. % approx . in N
einfahrend
5 5
Gesamthub mm
F1
F3
F4
F2
F
R
ausfahrend
Nutzhub mm
ausziehen
5 5
Gesamthub mm
F2
F4
F3
F1
F
R
Nutzhub mm
einziehen
F1 = nominal force at 20C (this is the pressure figure normally used when specifying the gas spring)
F2 = force in the complete compressed position
Traction Gas Spring (Pull Type)
Gas Spring Force-Stroke Characteristics
Standard Gas Spring (Push Type)
F1 = nominal force at 20C (this is the pressure figure normally used when
specifying the gas spring)
F2 = force in the complete extended position
* The Progression (the slope of the force line in the
diagrams above) is due to the reduction of the
internal gas volume as the piston rod moves from
its initial position to its fully stroked position.
The approx. progression values given above for
standard springs can be altered on request.
Effect of Temperature: The nominal
F1 figure is given at 20C. An increase
of 10C will increase force by 3.4%.
Filling Tolerance on F1 Force: -20 N to +40 N or
5% to 7%.
** depending on the filling force
*** depending on the stroke
Gas springs are universally accepted, wherever you want to
push, pull, lift, lower, or position covers, lids or other compo-
nents by hand without using an external energy source.
ACE gas springs are individually filled to a predetermined
pressure to suit a customers requirement (extension Force F1).
The cross-sectional area of the piston rod and filling pressure
determines the extension force F=p*A. During the compres-
sion of the piston rod, nitrogen flows through an orifice in the
piston from the full bore side of the piston to the annulus.
The nitrogen is compressed by the volume of the piston rod.
As the piston rod is compressed the pressure increases, so
increasing the reaction force (progression). The force depends
on the proportional relationship between the piston rod and
the inner tube diameter, which is approximately linear.
Service Life
Filling tolerance: -20N to +40N or 5% to 7%
Effect of temperature: An increase in temperature of each
10C will increase force by approx. 3.4%.
Temperature range: -20C to +80C (special seals
from -45C to 200C).
Mounting: The gas springs should ideally be installed with
the piston rod pointing downwards to use the end damping
during the extension stroke to smoothly decelerate the
motion of the gas spring. Some ACE gas springs have a
uniquely designed front bearing with an integrated grease
chamber allowing the gas spring to be mounted and oper-
ated in any position if required.
When fitting the gas springs ensure that the stroke is fully
extended (GZ type fully compressed), this makes assembly
and disassembly much easier. Support the moving mass/
flap during assembly or disassembly to prevent accident.
To avoid twisting or side loading, it is recommended that ball
joints or other pivoted mounting attachments are used.
The mounting attachments must always be securely tightened
onto the threaded studs of the gas spring.
ACE gas springs are maintenance-free. DO NOT oil or grease
the piston rod!
The piston rod must be protected from any hits, scratches or dirt
and especially paint. Damage to the surface finish of the piston
rod will destroy the sealing system and cause loss of pressure.
The outer body must not be deformed or mechanically damaged.
ACE gas springs can be stored in any position. Experience has
shown that long storage periods do not result in loss of pres-
sure. However you may experience some stiction requiring a
higher effort to move the gas spring for the first time after a
long storage period.
Generally, ACE gas springs are tested to 70 000 to 100 000
complete strokes (the automobile industry requires 50 000
strokes). During these tests the gas spring must not lose more
than 5 % of its pressure. Depending upon the application and
operating environment, the service life of these gas springs
may be much longer. In practise 500 000 strokes or more have
been achieved on some applications.
Lifetime traction gas spring see pages 118 and 119.
When compressing the piston rod, there is an additional
friction force caused by the contact pressure of the seals
(this only occurs during the compression stroke) F
R
F3 = force at the beginning of the compression stroke
F4 = force at the end of the compression stroke
When extending the piston rod, there is an additional
friction force caused by the contact pressure of the seals
(this only occurs during the extension stroke) F
R
F3 = force at the beginning of the extension stroke
F4 = force at the end of the extension stroke
Total Stroke mm
com
pression
extension
Total Stroke mm
outward stroke
inward stroke
Calculation, Safety Hints, Filling Kit
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
108
Calculation
To obtain the ideal selection to give the optimum operation
for a gas spring it is important to identify the following
points:
gas spring size
required gas spring stroke
mounting points on flap and frame
extended length of the gas spring
required extension force
hand forces throughout the complete movement
of the flap
With our free calculation service you can eliminate the
time-consuming calculation and fax us your details.
Just complete the information shown on the calculation
formulae page number 127.
Please attach a sketch of your application (a simple hand
sketch is sufficient) in side view. Our application engineers
will determine the optimum mounting points and calculate
the ideal situation to satisfy your requirements.
You will receive a quotation showing the opening and
closing forces and our recommended mounting points
to suit your application.
Safety Instructions
Gas springs are filled with pure nitrogen gas. Nitrogen is an
inert gas that does not burn or explode and is not poison-
ous. Please note!: the internal pressure of gas springs can
be up to 300 Bars. Do not attempt to open or modify them.
Disposal/Recycling: please ask for our disposal recommen-
dations.
All gas springs are marked with a warning sign Do not open,
high pressure, the part number and the production date.
We are not responsible for any damages, of whatever kind,
that arise due to goods that are not marked accordingly.
ACE gas springs are designed and tested to withstand the
highest demands and to provide maximum reliability.
Installation recommendations and our expert advisors will
assist you in choosing your individual gas spring. But: the
user is ultimately responsible for his own selection! You
should therefore satisfy yourself of the functionality and
service life of the product you choose.
Discharging/degassing gas springs: for valve gas springs,
see page 121.
The ACE Gas Spring Refilling Kit gives the ability to fill, or
adjust pressure (or force) of a Gas Spring on site.
You gain independence and flexibility. The refilling kit
includes all the parts necessary to fill your ACE gas springs
on site (models with adjustment valve only). Only the high
pressure nitrogen bottle is not included in the kit.
Gas spring refilling kit with one filling bell.
Please indicate the thread size.
Available
filling bells
M3.58: GS-8
M3.510: GS-10
M3.512: GS-12
M5: GS-15
M8: GS-19
GS-22
GZ-19
M10: GS-28
GZ-28
M14: GS-40
Calculation offer
with all required details
for assembly!
Independence and
flexibility!
GS-8 Gas Springs Push Type
Extension Forces 10 N to 100 N
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
109
18
4
!13
!8
6
!8
18
16
! 4
8
4
5 16
8
5
M3,5x0,6
5
18
!8
! 4,1
8
!3
! 4,1
Hub
Kugel
R 4
4 breit
12
4 breit
!8 8
18
M4x0,7
8,5
!13
!8
6
10
36
5
L = Hub + 10
!11
Technical Data
ACE gas springs are self-contained and maintenance
free. Standard gas springs with valve ex stock.
Mounting position: Can be mounted in any position
but we recommend mounting with piston rod down-
wards.
End position damping length: approx. 5 mm.
Progression: approx. 28%, F2 max. 130 N.
Operating fluid: Nitrogen gas and oil
(for end damping).
Available force range F1 at 20C: 10 to 100 N.
stainless steel. End fittings: zinc plated steel.
To special order: Without damping, extended length
damping, special force curves, special lengths,
alternative end fittings.
OA3.5
NA3.5
NG3.5
G3.5
A3.5
C3.5
D3.5
OG3.5
A3.5
GS-8
Type Stroke
mm
L
Extended
GS-8-20 20 72
GS-8-30 30 92
GS-8-40 40 112
GS-8-50 50 132
GS-8-60 60 152
GS-8-80 80 192
Dimensions
G3.5
A3.5
B3.5
C3.5
D3.5
Angle Ball Joint C3.5
Clevis Fork D3.5
Ball Socket G3.5
Eye A3.5
Stud Thread B3.5
U3.5
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W3.5-8
Rod Shroud
V3.5
Adjustment Valve
Ball
R 4
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 10
4 thick
4 thick
For mounting acces-
Ordering Example GS-8-30-AC-V-30
Type (Push Type)
Body (8 mm)
Stroke (30 mm)
Piston Rod End Fitting A3.5
Body End Fitting C3.5
Valve V3.5
Nominal Force F1 30 N
The end fittings are interchangeable.
For adjustment valve add suffix -V.
Technical Data
18
4
!13
!8
6
!8
18
16
! 4
8
4
5 16
8
5
M3,5x0,6
5
18
!8
! 4,1
8
!3
! 4,1
Hub
Kugel
R 4
4 breit
12
4 breit
!10 8
18
M4x0,7
8,5
!13
!8
6
10
36
5
L = Hub + 10
!13
wards.
(for end damping).
Type Stroke
mm
L
Extended
GS-10-20 20 72
GS-10-30 30 92
GS-10-40 40 112
GS-10-50 50 132
GS-10-60 60 152
GS-10-80 80 192
Dimensions
GS-10
G3.5
A3.5
B3.5
C3.5
D3.5
Clevis Fork D3.5
Ball Socket G3.5
Eye A3.5
Stud Thread B3.5
U3.5
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W3.5-10
Rod Shroud
OA3.5
NA3.5
NG3.5
G3.5
A3.5
C3.5
D3.5
OG3.5
A3.5
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
110
Ball
R 4
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 10
4 thick
4 thick
For mounting acces-
Type (Push Type)
Body (10 mm)
Stroke (80 mm)
Body End Fitting C3.5
Valve V3.5
V3.5
Adjustment Valve
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
111
Technical Data
18
4
!13
!8
6
! 8
18
16
!4
8
4
5 16
8
5
M3,5x0,6
5
18
!8
! 4,1
8
!4
! 4,1
Hub
Kugel
R 4
4 breit
12
4 breit
!12 8
18
M4x0,7
8,5
!13
!8
6
10
36
5
L = Hub + 10
!15
Type Stroke L max. F1
mm Extended
GS-12-20 20 72 180 N
GS-12-40 40 112 180 N
GS-12-50 50 132 180 N
GS-12-60 60 152 180 N
GS-12-80 80 192 150 N
GS-12-100 100 232 150 N
GS-12-120 120 272 120 N
GS-12-150 150 332 100 N
Dimensions
Mounting position: can be mounted in any position
but we recommend mounting with the piston rod
downwards so that the damping is effective at end
of extension stroke.
(for end damping).
damping, special force curves, special lengths (max.
150 mm stroke), alternative end fittings.
GS-12
G3.5
A3.5
B3.5
C3.5
D3.5
Clevis Fork D3.5
Ball Socket G3.5
Eye A3.5
Stud Thread B3.5
U3.5
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W3.5-12
Rod Shroud
OA3.5
NA3.5
NG3.5
G3.5
A3.5
C3.5
D3.5
OG3.5
A3.5
Ball
R 4
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 10
4 thick
4 thick
For mounting acces-
Ordering Example GS-12-100-AA-V-30
Type (Push Type)
Body (12 mm)
Stroke (100 mm)
Body End Fitting A3.5
Valve V3.5
V3.5
Adjustment Valve
Technical Data
5
22
28
30
20
22
4,5
!13
!8
12
! 8
10
28
SW13
20
45
M5x0,8
!8
24
!10
!6
6
!5
10
5
6 20
10
5
M5x0,8
5
22
!10
! 6,1
10
!6
! 6,1
Hub
Kugel
R 5
6 breit
16
6 breit
!15 10
L = Hub + 20
!19
22
M5x0,8
8
!13
!8
12
10
36
12
!13
4,5
10
30
12
(for end damping).
damping, special force curves, special lengths (max.
250 mm stroke), alternative end fittings, stainless
steel (see page 126).
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-15-20 20 66
GS-15-40 40 106
GS-15-50 50 126
GS-15-60 60 146
GS-15-80 80 186
GS-15-100 100 226
GS-15-120 120 266
GS-15-150 150 326
Dimensions
PA5
OA5
NA5
MA5
NG5
G5
A5
C5
D5
F5
E5
OG5
PG5
PA5
OA5
NA5
MA5
GS-15
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C5
D5
Angle Ball Joint C5
Clevis Fork D5
Swivel Eye E5
Inline Ball Joint F5
Ball Socket G5
Eye A5
Stud Thread B5
U5
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W5-15
Rod Shroud
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
112
Ball
R 5
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 20
AF13
6 thick
6 thick
For mounting acces-
Type (Push Type)
Body (15 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Piston Rod End Fitting A5
Body End Fitting C5
Valve V5
V5
Adjustment Valve
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
113
8
30
31
36
32
30
6
!20
!13
15
! 13
12
31
SW15
22
!12
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
9
M8x1,25
8
30
L = Hub + 30
!23
! 14
! 8,1
14 !8
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
10 breit
!19 14
45
M8x1,25
Technical Data
free, with strong end position damping and slow
extension speed. Standard gas springs with valve
ex stock.
Mounting postion: Can be mounted in any position
End damping length: approx. 20 to 60 mm (depending
on the stroke).
Progression: approx. 36 to 42 %, F2 max. 995 N.
Operating temperature: -20C to +80C
Operating fluid: Nitrogen gas and oil (for end damping).
To special order: Without damping, standard length
alternative end fittings, stainless steel (see page 126).
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-19-50 50 164
GS-19-100 100 264
GS-19-150 150 364
GS-19-200 200 464
GS-19-250 250 564
GS-19-300 300 664
Dimensions
PA8
OA8
NA8
MA8
NG8
G8
A8
C8
D8
F8
E8
OG8
PG8
PE8
OE8
NE8
ME8
E8
GS-19
E8
F8
G8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Swivel Eye E8
Ball Socket G8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
U8
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W8-19
Rod Shroud
AF15
Ball
R 7
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 30
10 thick
10 thick
For mounting acces-
Type (Push Type)
Body (19 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Body End Fitting C8
Valve V8
V8
Adjustment Valve
8
30
31
36
32
30
6
!20
!13
15
! 13
12
31
SW15
22
!12
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
9
M8x1,25
8
30
! 14
! 8,1
14
! 10
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
20
10 breit
! 22 14
L = Hub + 30
!28
45
M8x1,25
ex stock.
Mounting Position: Can be mounted in any position
wards so that damping is effective at end of extension
stroke.
End damping length: approx. 20 to 70 mm(depending
on the stroke).
Progression: approx. 39 to 50%, F2 max. 1950 N.
Technical Data
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-22-50 50 164
GS-22-100 100 264
GS-22-150 150 364
GS-22-200 200 464
GS-22-250 250 564
GS-22-300 300 664
GS-22-350 350 764
GS-22-400 400 864
GS-22-450 450 964
GS-22-500 500 1064
GS-22-550 550 1164
GS-22-600 600 1264
GS-22-650 650 1364
GS-22-700 700 1464
Dimensions
PA8
OA8
NA8
MA8
NG8
G8
A8
C8
D8
F8
E8
OG8
PG8
PE8
OE8
NE8
ME8
E8
GS-22
E8
F8
G8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Swivel Eye E8
Ball Socket G8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
U8
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W8-22
Rod Shroud
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
(Max. permitted
force
1200 N)
(Max. permitted
force 1200 N)
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
114
AF15
Ball
R 7
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 30
10 thick
10 thick
For mounting acces-
V8
Adjustment Valve
Ordering Example GS-22-150-AE-V-800
Type (Push type)
Body (22 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Body End Fitting E8
Valve V8
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
115
43
24
!15
!10
9
18
!19
7
14
43
16
43
19
43
SW17
25
SW17
40
!10
20
10
12 40
20
35
M10x1,5
16
!24
!16
18
20
36
9
M10x1,5
13
35
!18
! 8,1
17 !14
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 9
12 breit
12 breit
!28 17
13
L = Hub + 40
! 32
45
M10x1,5
Technical Data
ex stock.
stroke.
End damping length: approx. 30 to 70 mm(depending
on the stroke).
To special order: without damping, standard length
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-28-100 100 262
GS-28-150 150 362
GS-28-200 200 462
GS-28-250 250 562
GS-28-300 300 662
GS-28-350 350 762
GS-28-400 400 862
GS-28-450 450 962
GS-28-500 500 1062
GS-28-550 550 1162
GS-28-600 600 1262
GS-28-650 650 1362
GS-28-700 700 1462
GS-28-750 750 1562
Dimensions
GS-28
MA10
OE10
F10
A10
C10
D10
E10
PE10
ME10
E10
E10
F10
A10
B10
C10
D10
Clevis Fork D10
Swivel Eye E10
Eye A10
Stud Thread B10
U10
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W10-28
Rod Shroud
(Max. permitted
force 1800 N)
(Max. permitted
force 1800 N)
AF17
AF17
Ball
R 9
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 40
12 thick
12 thick
For mounting acces-
V10
Adjustment Valve
Ordering Example GS-28-150-EE-V-1200
Type (Push type)
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Valve V10
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
116
56
18
56
SW24
40
30
M14x1,5 SW22
57
16
!20
!14
19
30
!26
13
57
18
56
!14
27
14
16 56
27
45
M14x1,5
20
!30
!22
25
28
36
15
M14x1,5
15
45
!25
! 14,1
21 !20
!14,1
Hub
Kugel
R 12,5
14 breit
14 breit
!40 21
15
L = Hub + 40
! 45
18
ex stock.
stroke.
End damping length: approx. 3070 mm(depending
on the stroke).
Technical Data
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-40-100 100 317
GS-40-150 150 417
GS-40-200 200 517
GS-40-300 300 717
GS-40-400 400 917
GS-40-500 500 1117
GS-40-600 600 1317
GS-40-800 800 1717
GS-40-1000 1000 2117
Dimensions
ME14
A14
C14
D14
F14
E14
ND14
GS-40
E14
F14
A14
B14
C14
D14
Clevis Fork D14
Swivel Eye E14
Eye A14
Stud Thread B14
U14
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
W14-40
Rod Shroud
ME14
(Max. permitted
force 3200 N)
(Max. permitted
force
3200 N)
AF24 AF22
Ball
R 12,5
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 40
14 thick
14 thick
For mounting acces-
V14
Adjustment Valve
Ordering Example GS-40-150-DD-V-3500
Type (Push type)
Body (40 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Body End Fitting D14
Valve V14
Large Gas Springs GS-70
Extension Forces 2000 N to 13 000 N
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
117
100
!25
50
25
32 100
50
94
12
!34
!25
31
!42
40
22
30
94
30
!30
Hub
!70
M24x2
35
L = Hub + 50
!80
free. Standard gas springs with valve.
stroke.
End damping length: approx. 10 mm.
(for end damping).
Material: Body: powder coated steel or zinc plated
steel. Piston rod: hard chrome plated. End fittings:
zinc plated steel.
Technical Data
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GS-70-100 100 320
GS-70-200 200 520
GS-70-300 300 720
GS-70-400 400 920
GS-70-500 500 1120
GS-70-600 600 1320
GS-70-700 700 1520
GS-70-800 800 1720
Dimensions
ME24
D24
E24
ND24
GS-70
E24
B24
D24 Clevis Fork D24
Swivel Eye E24
Stud Thread B24
W24-70
Rod Shroud
L+/-2 mm extended
Stroke
L = Stroke + 50
For mounting acces-
Ordering Example GS-70-200-EE-8000
Type (Push Type)
Body (70 mm)
Stroke (200 mm)
Standard version includes valve.
10
30
36
32
30
6
!20
!13
15
! 13
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
!8
16
8
10 32
16
30
M8x1,25
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
10
M8x1,25
10
30
20 L+/- 2 mm eingefahren 20
!14
! 8,1
14 !6
! 8,1
Hub
Kugel
R 7
10 breit
10 breit
!19 14
L = Hub + 30
!23
Technical Data
ACE traction gas springs are self-contained and
maintenance free and supplied without damping.
Standard gas springs with valve ex stock.
Install mechanical stop in extended position.
Lifetime approx. 2000 m.
Operating fluid: Nitrogen gas and oil (for lubrication).
Available traction force range F1 at 20C: 30 to 300 N.
hard chrome plated. End fittings: zinc plated steel.
Note: Secure fittings with Loctite or similar.
To special order: Special force curves, special lengths,
Type Stroke L
mm Retracted
GZ-19-30 30 112
GZ-19-50 50 132
GZ-19-100 100 182
GZ-19-150 150 232
GZ-19-200 200 282
GZ-19-250 250 332
Dimensions
E8
G8
A8
B8
C8
D8
Angle Ball Joint C8
Clevis Fork D8
Swivel Eye E8
Ball Socket G8
Eye A8
Stud Thread B8
UZ8
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
GZ-19
WZ8-19
Rod Shroud
PA8
OA8
NA8
MA8
NG8
G8
A8
C8
D8
E8
OG8
PG8
PE8
OE8
NE8
ME8
E8
GZ-19 Traction Gas Springs Pull Type
Traction (Pull) Forces 30 N to 300 N
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
118
Ball
R 7
L+/-2 mm retracted Stroke
L = Stroke + 30
10 thick
10 thick
For mounting acces-
V8
Adjustment
Valve
Ordering Example GZ-19-150-AC-V-250
Type (Pull Type)
Body (19 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Body End Fitting C8
Valve V8
Traction Force F1 250 N
The end fittings are interchangeable and must
be positively secured by the customer to prevent
unscrewing (i.e. Loctite).
For adjustment valve add suffix -V
GZ-28 Traction Gas Springs Pull Type
Traction (Pull) Forces 150 N to 1200 N
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
119
Technical Data
ACE traction gas springs are self-contained and
maintenance free. Standard gas springs with valve
ex stock.
Install mechanical stop in extended position.
Lifetime approx. 2000 m.
Operating fluid: Nitrogen gas and oil (for lubrication).
Available traction force range F1 at 20C: 100 to 1200 N.
hard chrome plated. End fittings: zinc plated steel.
Note: secure end fittings with Loctite or similar.
To special order: Protective rod shroud (dim L + 10 mm),
special force curves, special lengths, alternative end
fittings.
12
43
24
!15
!10
9
18
!19
7
14
43
16
40
!10
20
10
12 40
20
12
M10x1,5
12
25
!18
! 8,1
17 !10
! 8,1
Kugel
R 9
12 breit
12 breit
!28 17
L+/- 2 mm eingefahren 25
35
M10x1,5
16
!24
!16
18
20
36
35
L = Hub + 40
!32
Hub
Type Stroke L
mm Retracted
GZ-28-30 30 130
GZ-28-50 50 150
GZ-28-100 100 200
GZ-28-150 150 250
GZ-28-200 200 300
GZ-28-250 250 350
GZ-28-300 300 400
GZ-28-350 350 450
GZ-28-400 400 500
GZ-28-450 450 550
GZ-28-500 500 600
GZ-28-550 550 650
GZ-28-600 600 700
GZ-28-650 650 750
Dimensions
MA10
A10
C10
D10
E10
OE10
PE10
ME10
E10
E10
A10
B10
C10
D10
Clevis Fork D10
Swivel Eye E10
Eye A10
Stud Thread B10
GZ-28
UZ10
Adjuster
Knob
See page 121.
WZ10-28
Rod Shroud
Ball
R 7
L+/-2 mm retracted Stroke
L = Stroke + 40
12 thick
12 thick
For mounting acces-
V10
Adjustment
Valve
Ordering Example GZ-28-150-EE-V-800
Type (Pull Type)
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Valve V10
Traction Force F1 800 N
The end fittings are interchangeable and must
be positively secured by the customer to prevent
unscrewing (i.e. Loctite).
For adjustment valve add suffix -V
GBF/GBS-28 Lockable Gas Springs Push Type
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
120
! 8,1
18
14
L+/- 2 mm ausgefahren
! 10
Hub
Kugel
R 10
25
12 breit
! 28
17
M10x1
6
6 SW 17
36
45
12
breit
!8,1
R
m
in
3
0
! 4
Schlauchlnge bei
Bestellung angeben,
max. 1500 mm
! 18
Kugel
R9
Auslsekopf
Auslsestift
min 37,5
! 20
! 25
! 20
10 17
5,5 SW 22 ! 21
0,1
59
Technical Data
RHD-L (up to 600 N)
RHD-H (more than 600 N)
Direct Hydraulic Release
RHP-L up to 600 N
more than 600 N on request
Parallel-Release
Two gas springs with
one hydr. release knob
RHO-L up to 600 N
RHO-H more than 600 N
OR-Release
One gas spring with
two hydr. release knobs
Hydraulic Remote Release System
for Lockable Gas Springs.
The Hydraulic release system is maintenance free and
self-contained. The release knob is designed for directly
mounting into a control panel. The release system is
available in direct, parallel and OR versions. The maxi-
mum connection tube length between the release knob
and the lockable Gas Spring is 1500 mm.
Function: Depressing the remote release knob causes
a small pressure rise which is transmitted to the release
head fitted onto the end of the gas spring piston rod.
This actuates the release pin in the end of the rod and
unlocks the gas spring. As long as the release knob is
depressed the gas spring is unlocked and operates as a
normal gas spring. Once the release knob is released
the gas spring locks again.
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GBF-28-50 50 190
GBF-28-80 80 270
GBF-28-100 100 310
GBF-28-150 150 410
GBF-28-200 200 490
GBF-28-300 300 700
GBF-28-400 400 890
Dimensions
GBF-28 spring locking
Type Stroke L
mm Extended
GBS-28-35 35 190
GBS-28-60 60 270
GBS-28-100 100 333
GBS-28-130 130 418
GBS-28-150 150 495
GBS-28-200 200 553
GBS-28-250 250 710
GBS-28-300 300 800
GBS-28-450 450 1135
GBS-28-500 500 1250
Dimensions
GBS-28 rigid locking
x
y z x
y z
End Fitting
A10
A10
AF 17
AF 22
Release Pin
Stroke
12
thick
12 thick
Ball
R 10
Ball
R 9
Release Head
Specify length of tube
when ordering.
max. 1500 mm
L+/-2 mm extended
Ordering Example GBF-28-150-1200-V-A
Type (Push Type)
Spring Locking
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Nominal Force F
1
1200 N
Valve V10
Rear Eye Fitting A10
For mountings and end fittings for rear of
body see page 124.
Ordering Example GBS-28-150-800-V-D
Type (Push Type)
Rigid Locking
Body (28 mm)
Stroke (150 mm)
Nominal Force F
1
800 N
Valve V10
Rear Clevis Fork Fitting D10
Ordering example: RHP-L-500-500-500 (x, y, z = 500 mm each)
Mechanical release systems see page 121.
N
E
W
ACE gas springs are self-contained
and maintenance free.
Mounting position: In any position.
Progression: approx. 50%,
F
2
max = 1950 N
-20C to +80C.
Hydraulic Remote Release:
10C to 60C.
Operating fluid: Nitrogen gas & oil.
Available force range: 100 N to
1300 N.
Rigid locking force: 6 to 8 times
the extension force (GBS).
Material: Body: powder coated
steel. Piston rod: hard chrome
plated. End fittings: zinc plated
steel.
To special order: Special lengths,
force adjustment valve etc.
GBF Type: is locked by blocking
gas flow across the piston.
GBS Type: is locked by blocking
oil flow across the piston, giving
a rigid hydraulic lock.
Hub
40
10
L
3 mm
SW10
M6
t = 18
3*15
tief
!
" 15
SW8
55
46,5
20
5
37
60
5
17,5
" 110
entriegelte Position
Release Systems for GBF/GBS-28
Adjustment Instruction Valve
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
121
121
1. Hold gas spring piston rod down.
2. Remove any fitting attached to the body end of the gas
spring (GZ version the piston rod).
3. Insert adjuster knob on thread end on the cylinder body
(on GZ version thread end on the piston rod).
When resistance is felt, proceed slowly but with caution.
This opens the valve and you can hear the nitrogen
escaping and reducing pressure. Turn back the adjust-
ing knob immediately, to avoid too much nitrogen
being discharged.
4. After adjustment, remove the Adjuster knob, mount the
end fittings and test the gas spring in your application.
If necessary repeat the procedure.
If you use 2 gas springs in parallel, both gas springs
should have the same force to avoid bending forces or
side load on the application. If necessary return to ACE
to refill both gas springs to the same (average) force.
If too much nitrogen is discharged, the units can be re-
turned to ACE for re-gassing.
Release the lock by moving the lever up or down.
The 90 offset through hole allows a simple variable
mounting.
Single release by operating the
lever or permanently release
by locking the lever in the open
position.
2 offset hole
90 offset Standard length L for
bowden wire (please
indicate when ordering)
518mm
768mm
1018mm
1268mm
1518mm
RMV RMA
! 8
Handgriff
! 8,2 0,1
15 - 0,2
114
20
40
40
7,5
Handgriff
GS GZ
Grip
Stroke
AF8
AF10
released position
deep
Grip
Mechanical Release Variable Lockable/Adjustable Release with Bowden Cable
Adjustment Instructions Valve
N
E
W
Just drill 4 holes ACE does all the
rest!
By taking advantage of the very exten-
sive range of ACE End Fittings and
Mounting Brackets you can easily and
simply install our gas springs and hy-
draulic dampers. You profit from
the wide variety of DIN Standard end
fittings such as swivel eyes, clevis
forks, angle ball joints, inline ball
joints, and complementary ball sock-
ets.
ACE also offers eye fittings made of
wear resistant steel to meet the high-
er specification requirements found
in industrial applications.
With over 30 different types available
these newly developed mounting
accessories provide an extensive
range of combinations for optimum
Installation.
With the ACE Selection Programme
you can choose not only your gas
springs but also the ideal end fittings
and mounting brackets for your indi-
vidual application example.
The complete range of accessories
are also available as individual compo-
nents.
The wide range of Mounting Brackets available
Interchangeable
Combinable
Gas Spring and Hydraulic Damper Accessories
End Fittings and Mounting Brackets
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
122
122
Mounting Accessories for Gas Springs and Dampers
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
123
Accessories M3.5x0.6
4 !
8
4
5 16
M3,5
8
18
M4x0,7
8,5
!13
!8
6
10
36
M3,5
18
4
!13
!8
6
M3,5
! 8
8
12
4,1
4 breit
M3,5
6
4
!8
G3.5
Ball Socket
DIN 71805 C3.5
Angle Ball Joint
DIN 71802 D3.5
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752 A3.5
Eye
GS 8, GS 10, GS 12
Accessories M5x0.8 GS 15, HB 15
NG3.5 NA3.5 OG3.5 OA3.5
!8
16
3 19
1,5
!3,3
4
10
!4
3,5 4,5
5,5 4,5
0,5
!8
12,5
4,5
18 5
5
16
!8
13
5
!4,3
!4
1
2
1,5
4,5 4,5
!8
5,5
14
*max. force 225 N *max. force 225 N *max. force 225 N *max. force 225 N
*max. force 225 N *max. force 225 N
!5
10
5
6 20
M5
10
22
M5
8
!13
!8
12
10
36
M5
10
16
6,1
6 breit
M5
8
5
!10
F5
Inline Ball Joint
C5
Angle Ball Joint
DIN 71802 D5
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752 E5
Swivel Eye
DIN 648 A5
Eye
MA5 NG5 NA5
36
9,5 51
2,5
!6,4
13
20
9
!6
6,5
18
2,5
4
34
5 40
2
!5,5
10
16
14
OG5 OA5 PG5 PA5
18 5
5
16
10
13
5
!4,3
!6
1
2,5
1,5
6 6,5
44
55 41
!5,5
!6
10
2,5
14 7
!14
!8
21
8
2
24
!10
!6
6
12
!13
4,5
10
30
12
M5
10
28
SW13
20
45
M5 !8
M5
*max. force 800 N
*max. force 500 N
!8
5,5
14
22
4,5
!13
!8
12
M5
! 8
G5
Ball Socket
DIN 71805
!6
6 7
10 10
1,3
!8
13
5
* Attention! Max. static Load in Newtons. Beware force increase during compression (Progression) and observe max. force limit.
Attention! Must only be used
with compression loads.
6 thick
4 thick
AF13
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
124
30
6
!20
!13
15
M8
! 13
Accessories M10x1.5 GS 28, GZ 28, GBF 28, GBS 28
ME10 MA10
36
9,5 51
2,5
!6,4
13
20
9
18
!8
13
4
OE10 PE10
55 7
10
30
16
23
7
!5,5
!10
4
3
10 9
2
44
55 41
!5,5
!10
2
4
15 9
!16
10
*max. force 1800 N
*max. force 1200 N
Accessories M8x1.25 GS 19, GS 22, GZ 19, HB 22, HB 28, DVC 32
!8
16
8
10 32
M8
16
30
M8
12
!20
!13
15
16,5
36
M8
14
20
8,1
10 breit
M8
10
6
!14
F8
Inline Ball Joint
C8
Angle Ball Joint
DIN 71802 D8
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752 E8
Swivel Eye
DIN 648 A8
Eye
ME8 MA8 NE8 NG8 NA8
36
9,5 51
2,5
!6,4
13
20
9
18
!8
13
4
34
5 40
2
!5,5
10
16
16
OE8 OG8 OA8 PG8 PA8 PE8
55 7
10
30
16
23
7
!5,5
!8
2
2,5
3
10 11
!8
5
3
10 8,5
44
55 41
!5,5
!8
10
2,5
15 11
!16
13
22,5
9
!8
2
5
15 8,5
24
!12
!8
8
16
!16
6
12
36
13
M8
12
31
SW15
22
45
M8 !12
M8
*max. force 3000 N
*max. force 1200 N
!10
20
10
12 40
M10
20
35
M10
16
!24
!16
18
20
36
M10
17
25
8,1
12 breit
M10
15
9
!18
F10
Inline Ball Joint
C10
Angle Ball Joint
DIN 71802 D10
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752 E10
Swivel Eye
DIN 648 A10
Eye
24
!15
!10
9
18
!19
7
14
43
16
M10
17
43
SW17
25
45
M10
SW17
M10
*max. force 10000 N *max. force 1800 N *max. force 10000 N *max. force 10000 N *max. force 1800 N
13
8
17,5
! 8
8
G8
Ball Socket
DIN 71805
!8
7 11
10 10
1,3
!8
7 8,5
13
14,5
5
!10
9
*max. force 1200 N
10 thick
12 thick
AF15
AF17
AF17
18
56
SW24
40
30
M14x1,5
M14x1,5
SW22
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
125
16
!20
!14
19
30
!26
13
18
57
18
M14x1,5
!14
27
14
16 56
M14x1,5
27
45
M14x1,5
20
!30
!22
25
28
36
M14x1,5
Accessories M14x1.5 GS 40, HB 40
Accessories M24x2 GS 70, HB 70
ME14 ND14
21
40
14,1
14 breit
M14x1,5
18
12
!25
F14
Inline Ball Joint
C14
Angle Ball Joint
DIN 71802 D14
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752 E14
Swivel Eye
DIN 648 A14
Eye
*max. force 10000 N *max. force 3200 N *max. force 10000 N *max. force 10000 N *max. force 3200 N
ME24 ND24
80
40
56
20
12
!25
50
25
32 100
M24x2
50
E24
Swivel Eye
DIN 648 D24
Clevis Fork
DIN 71752
12
!34
!25
31
40
!42
22
30
94
30
M24x2
14 thick
AF24 AF22
10
46
60
28
12
26
6
40
20
!14
M8x1,25
20
50
20
36
12
6 M8x1,25
14
!14
20
70
90
45
20
40
10
60
32
!25
M12x1,75
33
M12x1,75
24
!25
Gas Springs in 304 (V2A) Stainless
Steel
As well as its very extensive range of
standard adjustable force gas springs
ACE can offer a wide range of stainless
steel gas springs. These are manufac-
tured in 304 (V2A) stainless steel in
sizes from 15 mm to 40 mmouter
body diameter.
Furthermore this high quality stainless
finish is available in all stroke lengths
and force levels on request. The asso-
ciated end fittings such as clevis forks,
ball joints and swivel eyes etc. are also
available in 304 (V2A) stainless for all
model sizes. ACE Gas Springs are used
on a wide variety of applications to
control lifting or lowering of loads.
Through their unique properties of
being corrosion resistant and non-
magnetic these stainless springs are
the preferred choice for medical,
pharmaceutical, food, industry
and marine applications.
Special Industrial Gas Springs
Stainless Steel Gas Springs
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
126
40
!6,5
25,8
R4,5
29
R8,5
69
!6,5
51
17
!8,5
18
13
!8
23,6
+0,5
2,5
MA8-VA swivel assembly to suit flat eye end fittings
A8 and A10
in stainless steel
Piston Rod
in V2A (1.4305)
Front Bearing
in V2A (1.4305)
Body in V2A (1.4305)
Rear Endcap in V2A
(1.4305)
Gas springs ranging from
model GS-15 to GS-40 are
available in Stainless Steel
1.4301/ 1.4305
There are end fittings
simular to our standard
range available.
Gas Valve
Oil Zone for End Position Damping and
Lubrication (Recommended mounting
position: piston rod downwards)
"
(
9
0
)
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

A
n
g
l
e
In this example:
Starting Angle = 270
Opening Angle = +90
In this example:
Starting Angle = 348
Opening Angle = +80
Push type Pull type
Case 1 Case 2 (with attached sketch only)
Input Data
Gas Spring Fixing Points
The fixed point X
F
and Y
F
of the frame and the moving point X
L
and Y
L
of the flap are critical for the optimum operation.
Therefore please attach a sketch of your application on separate
paper (a few lines with their dimensions are sufficient)!
Moving mass m kg
No. of gas springs in parallel n pcs
Number of movements /day
Ambient temperature T C
(if not shown by the sketch)
Radius of centre of gravity R
M
mm
Radius of hand force R
H
mm
Starting angle (0 to360)
Opening angle (360 to +360) a
( = downwards, + = upwards)
Dimensions of the flap: thickness mm
Distance between flap and pivot:
Upper side O
K
= mm, Lower side U
K
= mm
Calculation Formulae
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
127
Desired Mounting Fittings
A A
B Stud Thread B
C Angle Ball Joint C
D Clevis Fork D
E Swivel Eye E
F Inline Ball Joint F
G Ball Socket G
e.g.: -CE C=Angle Ball Joint, E=Swivel Eye
Comments:
Sender:
Co.
Address
Internet
Name
Dept.
Tel
E-Mail
Fax
Requirement per year:
Machine type/reference:
Please copy, complete and fax to ACE: Fax 01925 229323!
Case 1 (e. g. Flap) Case 2 (e. g. Hood)
End Fitting End Fitting
"
(
8
0
)
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

A
n
g
l
e
Starting Angle
(-12 = 348)
Easier folding system
Secure opening and closing
ACE Gas Springs protect samples in an incubator used
in chemistry and biology labs.
How can you keep a hood made of Plexiglas, under
which valuable lab material is placed, secure in an open-
ed or closed position? With two maintenance-free,
ready to install ACE gas springs type GS-12-60-AA-X.
With 10 mm end-of-travel damping and an extension
force of between 10 and 180 N, these gas springs will
support and control the hood weight without difficulty.
The hood is always easily opened and the gas springs
will support it in this open position. The hood will also
stay securely closed during the incubation period.
With ACE Industrial Gas Springs, everything works.
These innovative, foldable ringside stands proved too
heavy to simply fold up by hand. Help came with
the installation of two ACE industrial gas springs type
GS-28-300-CC-V which are fitted with a special adjust-
ment valve system. At 28 mm diameter, they have a
stroke length of 300 mm and can provide an extension
force of between 150 N and 2 500 N.
They thereby provide the muscle power to support
the deadweight of the seat stand and allow easy hand
operated set-up of these ringside seats.
Mini incubator fitted with miniature gas springs
Foldable, space-saving ringside stands
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
128
GSG-22 Gate Gas Spring Oil Damped Type
Extension Forces 400 N, 500 N & 800 N
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
A specially designed gas spring acts as a safety product.
The gate gas spring provides a steady, slow and controlled
opening and closing of entrance gates in Schools, Sports
facilities and Homes where an Electro-magnetic security
lock and CCTV is often used in conjunction, to achieve a
high level of security. The special gas spring also steadies
the gate when opening and closing in strong winds,
although it always automatically closes slowly to allow
plenty of time tor people to pass through. The gate type
gas springs are self-contained, environmentaly friendly
and maintenance free for tens of thousands of automated
gate operations.
The gas springs are supplied with a choice of 400 N, 500 N
800 N ciosing forces. However each gas spring has a gas
pressure valve hidden in the stud of the body end fitting.
This can be carefully vented by threading on the the adju-
ster knob tool U10 to allow small amounts of the nitrogen
gas to be vented to suit each particular gate.
13
35 35
M10
16
!24
!16
18
20
36
25 L+/- 2 mm extended 25
!18 ! 8,1
17 !25 mm Dia. Shroud
! 8,1
Stroke
Ball
R 9
12 thick
12 thick
!22 17
A10
C10 Angle Ball Joint C10
Adjuster Knob Tool U10
Eye A10
(Max. permitted force 1600 N)
(Max. permitted force 1600 N)
Hidden Gas
pressure vent value
For alternative End
fittings see page 115
L+/- 2 mm extended
Ball
R 9
12 thick
Stroke
12 thick
Type Stroke L
extended
GSG-22-250 250 695
Dimensions
Gate Gas Spring Application
Technical Data
Ordering Example GSG-22-250-CC-500
For adjustment valve add suffix -V to part number.
ACE gas springs are self-contained and maintenance free.
Oildamping length: approx. complete 250 mm stroke
Material: Body: powder coated steel. Piston rod: hard
chrome plated. End fittings: zinc plated steel or aluminium.
Design and Layout for Gate Type Gas Springs
When Using C1O Angle Ball Joints
1) All dimensions and points are taken from the centre of the hinge pin.
2) Choose a position along the length of the gate for the point of the gas spring, (e.g. 600 mm, 650 mm, 675 mm).
This forms the radius of the gas spring movement.
3) Allow an offset on this point to give room at the side of the gate for a bracket
to attach the C1O right angle ball joint end fitting to.
4) From this point scribe an arc of 765 mm radius. This simulates the fully extended gas spring.
5) With the gate fully open now scribe an arc of 525 mm radius.
This simulates the closed gas spring allowing for a small amount
of free play. Do not forget the offset on the gate.
6) Where these two arcs cross is the point of the fixed position for the
gas spring.
7) By adjusting the radius at step (2) above, the gate can be made to open
through any reasonable angle you choose (i.e. 90 or more, or less)
8) The forces to open or close the gate can be adjusted by altering the
geometry of the mounting points.
Radius of Gas Spring
Offset of Spring
Radius of 765 mm
Point at which the gas spring is fixed to the frame, post.
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

r
a
d
i
u
s

(
S
w
u
n
g

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

9
0
)
R
a
d
i
u
s

o
f

5
2
5

m
m
R
a
d
i
u
s

o
f

g
a
s

s
p
r
i
n
g

c
l
o
s
e
d
(
W
i
t
h

t
h
e

g
a
t
e

s
w
u
n
g

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

9
0
)
Local Contacts
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
130
Paul Corkill Northern Area
AB Aberdeen KY Kirkcaldy
BB Blackburn IM Isle of Man
BD Bradford L Liverpool
BL Bolton LA Lancaster
CA Carlisle LL Llandudno
CH Chester LS Leeds
CW Crewe M Manchester
DD Dundee ML Motherwell
DG Dunfries NE Newcastle
DH Durham OL Oldham
DL Darlington PA Paisley
EH Edinburgh PH Perth
FK Falkirk PR Preston
FY Blackpool SK Stockport
G Glasgow SR Sunderland
HD Huddersfield TD Galashields
HG Harrogate TS Cleveland
HX Halifax WA Warrington
IV Inverness WF Wakefield
KA Kilmarnock WN Wigan
KW Kirkwall YO York
Darren Harper Midlands Area
B Birmingham MK Milton Keynes
CV Coventry NG Nottingham
DE Derby NN Northampton
DN Doncaster PE Peterborough
HU Hull S Sheffield
LE Leicester ST Stoke on Trent
LN Lincoln WS Walsall
Paul Constable South East Area
AL St. Albans ME Medway
BH Bournemouth NR Norwich
BN Brighton PO Portsmouth
CB Cambridge RG Reading
CM Chelmsford RH Redhill
CO Colchester SG Stevenage
CT Canterbury SL Slough
GU Guildford SO Southampton
HP Hemel Hempstead SS Southend on Sea
IP Ipswich TN Tonbridge
LU Luton
All London Postcode Areas
UK Local Distributors
South Wales South West
Wales Fluid Power Applied Automation
Tel: 029 20 494551 Plymouth
Fax: 029 20 481955 Tel: 01752 343300
Fax: 01752 331199
Northern Ireland
Northern Automation Itd Scotland
Tel: 028 28 270099 Macscott Bond
Fax: 028 28 270080 Tel: 0131 4482950
Fax: 0131 4482941
East Anglia
Parker Hydraulics & Pneumatics
Tel: 01603 403190
Fax: 01603 485337
Northern England
Thomas Wright / Thorite Group
Thorite House, Laisterdyke,
Bradford BD4 8BZ
Tel: 01274 663471
Fax: 01274 668296
Malcolm Sharland South West Area
BA Bath PL Plymouth
BS Bristol SA Swansea
CF Cardiff SN Swindon
DY Dudley SP Salisbury
DT Dorchester SY Shrewsbury
EX Exeter TA Taunton
GL Gloucester TF Telford
HR Hereford TQ Torquay
LD Llandrindod Wells TR Truro
NP Newport WR Worcester
OX Oxford WV Wolverhampton
Further Information and Local Contacts
I
s
s
u
e

9
.
2
0
0
4

S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

s
u
b
j
e
c
t

t
o

c
h
a
n
g
e
FAX REQUEST
Company
Address
Postcode.
Telephone/Fax.
Contact name/Dept.
YES! We are interested in:
further copy of the new ACE Catalogue.
the new ACE CAD-Library with Selection
programme on CD-Rom. 2D- and
3D-Version (standard formats).
Training at our site.
Technical assistance at our site.
Please quote for: (attach details)
FAX
t
o

0
1
9
2
5

2
2
9
3
2
3
ACE Area Managers
NORTH
Paul Corkill
Tel: 07802 926 431
Fax: 0151 283 8710
E-mail: paulcorkill@acecontrols.co.uk
MIDLANDS
Darren Harper
Tel: 07764 357 495
Fax: 01623 652 920
E-mail: darrenharper@acecontrols.co.uk
SOUTH EAST
Paul Constable
Tel: 07802 926 429
Home: 01342 311 171
Fax: 01342 316 119
E-mail: paulconstable@acecontrols.co.uk
SOUTH WEST
Malcolm Sharland
Tel: 07802 926 430
Fax: 02920 860 115
E-mail: malcolmsharland@acecontrols.co.uk
I
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l

S
h
o
c
k

A
b
s
o
r
b
e
r
s
Worldwide
ARGENTINA
CAMOZZI NEUMATICA S.A.
Prof. Dr. Pedro Chutro 3048
c1437iyj Buenos Aires
Repblica Argentina
Tel.: (00 54) 11 49 11 08 16
Fax: (00 54) 11 49 12 41 91
AUSTRALIA
IMI NORGREN LTD.
33 South Corporate Av.
Rowville, Victoria 3178, Australia
Tel.: (00 61) 3 92 13 08 00
Fax: (00 61) 3 92 13 08 98
AUSTRIA
ACE STOSSDMPFER GMBH
Herzogstrae 26-28, D-40764 Langenfeld
Postfach 1510, D-40740 Langenfeld
Tel.: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 10
Fax: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 19
(Vertriebspartner auf Anfrage)
BRAZIL
OBR EQUIPAMENTOS
INDUSTRIAIS LTDA.
Rua Piratuba, 1573-Joinville-SC,
CEP 89.222-061, Brazil
Tel.: (00 55) 0800 7 04 36 98
Fax: (00 55) 4 74 25 90 30
BELGIUM
Tel.: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 10
Fax: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 19
CANADA
COWPER, LTD.
677 7th Avenue, Lachine, Quebec H8S 3A1
Tel.: (0 01) 5 14-6 37-67 46
Fax: (0 01) 5 14-6 37-50 55
CHILE
TAYLOR
AUTOMATIZACION S. A.
A.V. Vicuna Mackenna # 1589
Santiago, Chile
Tel.: (00 56) 25 55 15 16
Fax: (00 56) 25 44 19 65
CROATIA AND BOSNIA
BIBUS ZAGREB D.O.O.
Anina 91, HR-10000 Zagreb,
Croatia
Tel.: (00 385) 13 81 80 06
Fax: (00 385) 13 81 80 05
CZECH REPUBLIC
BIBUS S.R.O.
Videnska 125, CZ-63927 Brno,
Czech Republic
Tel.: (0 04 20) 5 47 12 53 00
Fax: (0 04 20) 5 47 12 53 10
DENMARK
AVN PNEUMATIK A/S
Dalager 1,
DK-2605 Broendby,
Denmark
Tel.: (00 45) 70 20 04 11
Fax: (00 45) 43 24 55 00
FINLAND
NESTEPAINE OY.
Makituvantie 11, FIN-01510 Vantaa,
Finland
Tel.: (0 03 58) 9 61 36 33
Fax: (0 03 58) 9 61 36 36 66
FRANCE
BIBUS DOEDIJNS
ZI du Chapotin
F-69970 Chaponnay
France
Tel.: (00 33) 4 78 96 80 00
Fax: (00 33) 4 78 96 80 01
GERMANY
Tel.: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 10
Fax: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 19
GREECE
PNEUMATEC
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
Nevrokopiu 18, Athens 11855
Greece
Tel.: (00 302) 1 03412101/3413930
Fax: (00 302) 1 03413930
HONGKONG
IMI NORGREN LIMITED
6th Floor, Benson Tower
74 Hung To Road, Kwun Tong
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel.: (0 08 52) 24 92 76 08
Fax: (0 08 52) 24 98 58 78
HUNGARY
YERUHAM MUVEK KFT.
1133 Budapest, XIII. district,
Vs str. 9-11, (Entrance: Sll str. 8)
Hungary
Tel.: (00 36) 1-4 12-41 61
Fax: (00 36) 1-4 12-41 71
BIBUS KFT.
HU-1103 Budapest, jhegyi t 2, Hungary
Tel.: (00 36) 1265 27 33
Fax: (00 36) 1264 89 00
INDIA
MACO CORPORATION (INDIA)
PVT LTD.
2/5 Sarat Bose Road,
Sukhsagar 7th Floor, 7A, Kolkata - 700 020
Calcutta, India
Tel.: (00 91) 33 24 75 83 71/85 00/24 54 32 81
Fax: (00 91) 33 24 54 32 69
3D EQUIPMENT
319 Maheshwari Chambers
6-3-650 Somajiguda
Hyderabad, 500 082 India
Tel.: (00 91) 0 40 55 66 81 09
Fax: (00 91) 0 40 55 62 87 27
IRELAND
IRISH PNEUMATIC
SERVICES LTD.
Unit 2014, City West Business Campus
Saggart, Co. Dublin, Ireland
Tel.: (0 03 53) 14 66 02 00
Fax: (0 03 53) 14 66 01 58
ISRAEL
ILAN & GAVISH
AUTOMATION SERVICE LTD.
24, Shenkar Street, Qiryat-arie 49513
P.O. Box 10118, Petha-Tiqva 49001, Israel
Tel.: (0 09 72) 39 22 18 24
Fax: (0 09 72) 39 24 07 61
ITALY
R.T.I. S.R.L.
Via Chambery 93/107V,
10142 Turin, Italy
Tel.: (00 39) 011-70 00 53/70 02 32
Fax: (00 39) 011-70 01 41
JAPAN
ACE CONTROLS JAPAN LTD.
Tanaka Bldg. 3rd Floor, 2-9-6 Kanda-Tacho,
Chiyoda-Ku, Tokyo, 101-0046 Japan
Tel.: (00 81) 3 52 97 25 10
Fax: (00 81) 3 52 97 25 17
JORDAN
ATAFAWOK TRADING EST.
P.O. Box 921797, Amman 11192,
Jordan
Tel.: (0 09 62) 64 02 38 73
Fax: (0 09 62) 65 92 63 25
KOREA
KOREA PNEUMATIC SYSTEM CO., LTD.
Rm 206, Saehan Venture World B/D,
#113-15 Siheung-dong, Keumchun-gu,
Seoul, Korea, Zip Code:153-839
Tel.: (00 82) 2 2617 5008
Fax: (00 82) 2 2617 5009
LUXEMBOURG
Tel.: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 10
Fax: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 19
MALAYSIA
HOERBIGER-ORIGA SDN BHD
12 Jalan USJ 7 / 3A
47610 UEP Subang Jaya
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel.: (00 65) 64 83 29 59
Fax: (00 65) 64 83 29 79
IMI NORGREN PTE. LTD.
16 Tuas Street, Singapore 638453
Tel.: (00 65) 68 62 18 11
Fax: (00 65) 68 62 19 16
MEXICO
KOPAR S.A. DE C.V.
Thomas Alva Edison 3116
Fraccionamiento Industrial
Monterrey, N.L. 64299 Mexico
Tel.: (00 52) 81 12 57 50 00
Fax: (00 52) 81 83 51 59 43
NETHERLANDS
Tel.: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 10
Fax: (00 49) 21 73-92 26 19
NEW ZEALAND
IMI NORGREN (N.Z.) LTD.
3-5 Walls Road
P. O. Box 12-893, Penrose, Auckland
Tel.: (00 64) 95 79 01 89
Fax: (00 64) 95 26 33 99
NORWAY
OILTECH AS.
Dynamitveien 23, Postboks 133
N-1401 Ski, Norway
Tel.: (00 47) 64 91 11 80
Fax: (00 47) 64 87 43 21
PAKISTAN
J.J. HYDRAULICS &
PNEUMATICS
Hotel Metropole Bldg.
Room 127, 1st Floor Club Road
Karachi, Pakistan 75520
Tel.: (00 92) 2 15 66 10 63
Fax: (00 92) 2 15 66 10 65
POLAND
BIBUS MENOS SP.Z.O.O.
ul. Tadeusza Wendy 7/9
81-341 Gdynia, Poland
Tel.: (00 48) 5 86 60 95 70
Fax: (00 48) 5 86 61 71 32
PORTUGAL
AIRCONTROL S.A.
Paseo Sarroeta 4
E-20014 San Sebastian, Spain
Tel.: (00 34) 9 43 44 50 80
Fax: (00 34) 9 43 44 51 53
PUERTO RICO
P & C COMPANY
P.O. Box 120
Canovanas, Puerto Rico 00729
Tel.: (00 17 87) 7 68 50 33
Fax: (00 17 87) 7 50 68 20
SINGAPORE
HOERBIGER-ORIGA PTE. LTD.
Block 5012 Ang Mo Kio Avenue 5#05-01
TECHplace ll
Singapore 569876
Tel.: (00 65) 64 83 29 59
Fax: (00 65) 64 83 29 79
SLOVAKIA
BIBUS SK, S.R.O.
Priemyselna 4, SK-94901 Nitra, Slovakia
Tel.: (0 04 21) 37-741-2525
Fax: (0 04 21) 37-516-6701
SLOVENIA
INOTEH D. O. O.
Vorohova 20, SI-2345 Bistrica ob Dravi
Slovenia
Tel.: (0 03 86) 02 665 1131
Fax: (0 03 86) 02 665 2081
SOUTH AFRICA
ISANDO PNEUMATICS
(PTY) LTD.
1, Skietlood Street, Isando ext. 3
P.O. Box 441, Isando 1600, South Africa
Tel.: (00 27) 1 19 74 51 76
Fax: (00 27) 1 19 74 61 37
SPAIN
AIRCONTROL, S. A.
Paseo Sarroeta 4
E-20014 San Sebastian, Spain
Tel.: (00 34) 9 43 44 50 80
Fax: (00 34) 9 43 44 51 53
SWEDEN
HYDNET AB
Turebergsvagen 5
191 47 Sollentuna, Sweden
Tel.: (00 46) 8 59 47 04 70
Fax: (00 46) 8 59 47 04 79
SWITZERLAND
BIBUS AG
Hertistrasse 1
CH-8304 Wallisellen, Switzerland
Tel.: (00 41) 18 77 50 11
Fax: (00 41) 18 77 50 19
TAIWAN
DANYAO TRADING
COMPANY LTD.
7F, NO. 19, Chung-Cheng Road
Hsin-Chuang City, 242
Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel.: (0 08 86) 2 22 76 82 00
Fax: (0 08 86) 2 22 76 75 73
THAILAND
B-TAC AUTOMATION
LTD. PART.
2036/42 SOI 60/2 Sukhumvit Rd
10250 Bangkok
Tel.: (00 66) 2-33 19 06 24
Fax: (00 66) 2-33 23 87 0
TURKEY
T.M.G. PNEUMATIC &
HYDRAULIC LTD.
Necatibey Cad No. 54
80030 Karakoy, Turkey
Tel.: (00 90) 21 22 93 82 00
Fax: (00 90) 21 22 49 88 34
USA
ACE CONTROLS
INTERNATIONAL INC.
P.O. Box 71, Farmington
USA-Michigan 48024
(and in all states)
Tel.: (0 01) 2 48-4 76-02 13
Fax: (0 01) 2 48-4 76-24 70
ACE Controls International Bel vedere Road, Newton- Le- Wi l l ows, Merseysi de, WA12 OJJ Tel : 01925 227171
Fax: 01925 229323 e- mai l : i nfo@ace- control s.co.uk www.ace- control s.co.uk

Catalog Ace

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Ace

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Ace

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automation Control Equipment

0.5 m/s) characteristics of all types are available on request.

0.5 m/s) characteristics of all types are available on request.

0.5 m/s) characteristics of all types are available on request.

0.5 m/s) characteristics of all types are available on request.

You might also like